Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

MG11F502 VSD

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 134

MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE

Operating Instructions
VLT® HVAC Drive FC 102
315-1400 kW

www.danfoss.com/drives
Contents Operating Instructions

Contents

1 Introduction 4
1.1 Purpose of the Manual 4
1.2 Additional Resources 5
1.3 Document and Software Version 5
1.4 Approvals and Certifications 5

2 Safety 6
2.1 Safety Symbols 6
2.2 Qualified Personnel 6
2.3 Safety Precautions 6
2.3.1 Safe Torque Off (STO) 7

3 Mechanical Installation 8
3.1 How to Get Started 8
3.2 Pre-installation 8
3.2.1 Planning the Installation Site 8
3.2.2 Receiving the Frequency Converter 9
3.2.3 Transportation and Unpacking 9
3.2.4 Lifting 9
3.2.5 Mechanical Dimensions 11
3.2.6 Rated Power 15
3.3 Mechanical Installation 16
3.3.1 Tools Needed 16
3.3.2 General Considerations 16
3.3.3 Terminal Locations - E Enclosures 17
3.3.4 Terminal Locations - Enclosure type F 22
3.3.5 Cooling and Airflow 26
3.3.6 Gland/Conduit Entry - IP21 (NEMA 1) and IP54 (NEMA12) 28
3.4 Field Installation of Options 29
3.4.1 Installation of Duct Cooling Kit in Rittal Enclosures 29
3.4.2 Installation of Top-only Duct Cooling Kit 30
3.4.3 Installation of Top and Bottom Covers for Rittal Enclosures 30
3.4.4 Installation of Top and Bottom Covers 31
3.4.5 Outside Installation/NEMA 3R Kit for Rittal Enclosures 31
3.4.6 Outside Installation/NEMA 3R Kit for Industrial Enclosures 32
3.4.7 Installation of IP00 to IP20 Kits 32
3.4.8 Installation of IP00 E2 Cable Clamp Bracket 32
3.4.9 Installation of Mains Shield for Frequency Converters 32
3.4.10 Enclosure Size F USB Extension Kit 33
3.4.11 Installation of Input Plate Options 33

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 1


Contents Operating Instructions

3.4.12 Installation of E Load Share Option 34


3.5 Enclosure Type F Panel Options 34
3.5.1 Enclosure Type F Options 34

4 Electrical Installation 36
4.1 Electrical Installation 36
4.1.1 Power Connections 36
4.1.2 Grounding 43
4.1.3 Extra Protection (RCD) 43
4.1.4 RFI Switch 43
4.1.5 Torque 43
4.1.6 Screened Cables 44
4.1.7 Motor Cable 44
4.1.8 Brake Cable for Frequency Converters with Factory-installed Brake Chopper Op-
tion 45
4.1.9 Brake Resistor Temperature Switch 45
4.1.10 Load Sharing 45
4.1.11 Shielding against Electrical Noise 45
4.1.12 Mains Connection 46
4.1.13 External Fan Supply 46
4.1.14 Fuses 46
4.1.15 Motor Insulation 50
4.1.16 Motor Bearing Currents 50
4.1.17 Control Cable Routing 51
4.1.18 Access to Control Terminals 52
4.1.19 Electrical Installation, Control Terminals 52
4.1.20 Electrical Installation, Control Cables 54
4.1.21 Switches S201, S202 and S801 56
4.2 Connection Examples 57
4.2.1 Start/Stop 57
4.2.2 Pulse Start/Stop 58
4.3 Final Set-up and Test 59
4.4 Additional Connections 60
4.4.1 Mechanical Brake Control 60
4.4.2 Parallel Connection of Motors 60
4.4.3 Motor Thermal Protection 61

5 How to Operate the Frequency Converter 62


5.1 Operating with LCP 62
5.1.1 Three Ways of Operating 62
5.1.2 How to Operate Graphical LCP (GLCP) 62

2 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Contents Operating Instructions

5.2 Operating via Serial Communication 66


5.2.1 RS-485 Bus Connection 66
5.3 Operating via PC 66
5.3.1 How to Connect a PC to the Frequency Converter 66
5.3.2 PC Software Tools 66
5.3.3 Tips and Tricks 67
5.3.4 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings when Using GLCP 67
5.3.5 Initialisation to Default Settings 68

6 How to Programme 69
6.1 Basic Programming 69
6.1.1 Parameter Set-Up 69
6.1.2 Quick Menu Mode 73
6.1.3 Function Set-ups 77
6.1.4 5-1* Digital Inputs 87
6.1.5 Main Menu Mode 99
6.1.6 Parameter Selection 99
6.1.7 Changing Data 100
6.1.8 Changing a Text Value 100
6.1.9 Changing a Group of Numeric Data Values 100
6.1.10 Changing of Data Value, Step by Step 101
6.1.11 Readout and Programming of Indexed Parameters 101
6.2 Parameter Menu Structure 101

7 General Specifications 106


7.1 Motor Output and Motor Data 106
7.2 Ambient Conditions 106
7.3 Cable Specifications 107
7.4 Control Input/Ouput and Control Data 107
7.5 Electrical Data 111

8 Warnings and Alarms 116

Index 128

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 3


Introduction Operating Instructions

1 1 1 Introduction

1.1 Purpose of the Manual 1.1.2 Abbreviations and Standards


These operating instructions provide information for safe Abbrevi-
installation and commissioning of the frequency converter. Terms SI units I-P units
ations
a Acceleration m/s2 ft/s2
The operating instructions are intended for use by AWG American wire gauge
qualified personnel. Auto Tune Automatic motor tuning
Read and follow the operating instructions to use the
°C Celsius
frequency converter safely and professionally, and pay
I Current A Amp
particular attention to the safety instructions and general
ILIM Current limit
warnings. Keep these operating instructions available with
IT mains Mains supply with star point
the frequency converter at all times.
in transformer floating to
ground
VLT® is a registered trademark.
Joule Energy J=N∙m ft-lb, Btu
°F Fahrenheit
1.1.1 Intended Use FC Frequency converter
f Frequency Hz Hz
The frequency converter is an electronic motor controller kHz Kilohertz kHz kHz
intended for:
LCP Local control panel
• Regulation of motor speed in response to system mA Milliampere
feedback or to remote commands from external ms Millisecond
controllers. A power drive system consists of the min Minute
frequency converter, the motor and equipment MCT Motion Control Tool
driven by the motor. M-TYPE Motor type dependent
• System and motor status surveillance. Nm Newton metres in-lbs
IM,N Nominal motor current
The frequency converter can also be used for motor
protection. fM,N Nominal motor frequency
PM,N Nominal motor power

Depending on configuration, the frequency converter can UM,N Nominal motor voltage
be used in stand-alone applications or form part of a larger PELV Protective extra low voltage
appliance or installation. Watt Power Btu/hr,
W
hp
The frequency converter is allowed for use in residential, Pascal Pressure psi, psf,
Pa =
industrial and commercial environments in accordance ft of
N/m²
with local laws and standards. water
IINV Rated inverter output current

NOTICE RPM Revolutions per minute


s Second
In a residential environment this product can cause radio SR Size related
interference, in which case supplementary mitigation
T Temperature C F
measures can be required.
t Time s s,hr
TLIM Torque limit
Foreseeable misuse
U Voltage V V
Do not use the frequency converter in applications which
are non-compliant with specified operating conditions and Table 1.1 Abbreviations and Standards
environments. Ensure compliance with the conditions
specified in chapter 7 General Specifications.

4 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Introduction Operating Instructions

1.2 Additional Resources 1.4 Approvals and Certifications 1 1


• VLT® HVAC Drive FC 102 Design Guide holds all
technical information about the frequency
converter and customer design and applications.

• VLT® HVAC Drive FC 102 Programming Guide


provides information on how to programme and
includes complete parameter descriptions.

• Application Note, Temperature Derating Guide.

• MCT 10 Set-up Software Operating Instructions


enables the user to configure the frequency The frequency converter complies with UL508C thermal
converter from a Windows™-based PC memory retention requirements. For more information,
environment. refer to the section Motor Thermal Protection in the
product specific design guide.
• Danfoss VLT® Energy Box software at
www.danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions, NOTICE
then select PC Software Download. Imposed limitations on the output frequency
• VLT® HVAC Drive BACnet, Operating Instructions. (due to export control regulations):
From software version 3.92, the output frequency of the
• VLT® HVAC Drive Metasys, Operating Instructions.
frequency converter is limited to 590 Hz.
• VLT® HVAC Drive FLN, Operating Instructions.
Danfoss technical literature is available in print from local
Danfoss Sales Offices, or as electronic copies at:
www.danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions/Documen-
tations/Technical+Documentation.htm

1.3 Document and Software Version


This manual is regularly reviewed and updated. All
suggestions for improvement are welcome. Table 1.2 shows
the document version and the corresponding software
version.

Edition Remarks Software version


MG11F5xx Replaces MG11F4xx 4.1x

Table 1.2 Document and Software Version

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 5


Safety Operating Instructions

2 Safety
2 2
2.1 Safety Symbols WARNING
The following symbols are used in this document: UNINTENDED START!
When the frequency converter is connected to AC mains,
the motor may start at any time. The frequency
WARNING converter, motor, and any driven equipment must be in
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could operational readiness. Failure to be in operational
result in death or serious injury. readiness when the frequency converter is connected to
AC mains could result in death, serious injury, equipment

CAUTION or property damage.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could


result in minor or moderate injury. It can also be used to WARNING
alert against unsafe practices. DISCHARGE TIME!
Frequency converters contain DC link capacitors that can
NOTICE remain charged even when the frequency converter is
not powered. To avoid electrical hazards, disconnect AC
Indicates important information, including situations that
mains, any permanent magnet type motors, and any
can result in damage to equipment or property.
remote DC link power supplies, including battery
backups, UPS and DC link connections to other
2.2 Qualified Personnel frequency converters. Wait for the capacitors to
discharge completely before performing any service or
Correct and reliable transport, storage, installation,
repair work. The waiting time duration is listed in
operation, and maintenance are required for the trouble-
Table 2.1. Failure to wait the specified time after power
free and safe operation of the frequency converter. Only
has been removed before doing service or repair could
qualified personnel are allowed to install or operate this
result in death or serious injury.
equipment.

Voltage [V] Power size [kW] Min. waiting time


Qualified personnel are defined as trained staff, who are
(min)
authorised to install, commission, and maintain equipment,
systems, and circuits in accordance with pertinent laws and 380 - 480 315 - 1000 40
regulations. Additionally, the qualified personnel must be 525 - 690 450 - 1400 30
familiar with the instructions and safety measures Be aware that there may be high voltage on the DC link even
described in these operating instructions. when the LEDs are turned off.

2.3 Safety Precautions Table 2.1 Discharge Time

WARNING WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE! LEAKAGE CURRENT HAZARD!
Frequency converters contain high voltage when Leakage currents are higher than 3.5 mA. It is the
connected to AC mains input power. Installation, start- responsibility of the user or certified electrical installer to
up, and maintenance must be performed by qualified ensure correct grounding of the equipment. Failure to
personnel only. Failure to perform installation, start-up, ground the frequency converter properly could result in
and maintenance by qualified personnel could result in death or serious injury.
death or serious injury.

6 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Safety Operating Instructions

WARNING
EQUIPMENT HAZARD!
Rotating shafts and electrical equipment can be
hazardous. All electrical work must conform to national
2 2
and local electrical codes. Installation, start-up, and
maintenance are performed only by trained and
qualified personnel. Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
WINDMILLING!
Unintended rotation of permanent magnet motors
causes a risk of personal injury and equipment damage.
Ensure permanent magnet motors are blocked to
prevent unintended rotation.

CAUTION
POTENTIAL HAZARD IN THE EVENT OF
INTERNAL FAILURE!
Risk of personal injury when the frequency converter is
not properly closed. Before applying power, ensure all
safety covers are in place and securely fastened.

2.3.1 Safe Torque Off (STO)

STO is an option. To run STO, additional wiring for the


frequency converter is required. Refer to VLT® Frequency
Converters Safe Torque Off Operating Instructions for further
information.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 7


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

3 Mechanical Installation

3.1 How to Get Started L1

130BA015.13
L2

3 3 This chapter covers mechanical and electrical installations


to and from power terminals and control card terminals.
L3

PE
Electrical installation of options is described in the relevant F1
operating instructions and design guide.
The frequency converter is designed to achieve a quick
and EMC-correct installation.
12
91 92 93 95 88 89
DC- DC+
WARNING
27
L1 L2 L3 PE 1
37
Read the safety instructions before installing the unit.
18
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death
50
or serious injury.
53
U V W PE 55
Mechanical installation R- R+
• Mechanical mounting. 96 97 98 99 81 82

Electrical installation
• Connection to mains and protective earth.
• Motor connection and cables.

• Fuses and circuit breakers. M


3
• Control terminals - cables.
Illustration 3.1 Diagram showing basic installation including
Quick Set-up
mains, motor, start/stop key, and potentiometer for speed
• Local Control Panel, LCP. adjustment.
• Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA.

• Programming.
3.2 Pre-installation
Enclosure size depends on enclosure type, power range
and mains voltage.
3.2.1 Planning the Installation Site

CAUTION
It is important to plan the installation of the frequency
converter. Neglecting to plan may result in extra work
during and after installation.

Select the best possible operation site by considering


the following (see details on the following pages, and
the respective design guides):
• Ambient operating temperature.
• Installation method.

• How to cool the unit.

• Position of the frequency converter.

• Cable routing.

• Ensure that the power source supplies the correct


voltage and necessary current.

• Ensure that the motor current rating is within the


maximum current from the frequency converter.

8 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

• If the frequency converter is without built-in NOTICE


fuses, ensure that the external fuses are rated
The plinth is provided in the same packaging as the
correctly.
frequency converter but is not attached to enclosure
sizes F1-F4 during shipment. The plinth must allow
3.2.2 Receiving the Frequency Converter airflow to the frequency converter to provide proper

When receiving the frequency converter, make sure that


cooling. The F enclosures should be positioned on top of
the plinth in the final installation location. The angle
3 3
the packaging is intact. Also be aware of any damage that from the top of the frequency converter to the lifting
might have occurred to the unit during transport. In case cable should be ≥60°.
damage has occurred, immediately contact the shipping In addition to the lifting methods shown (Illustration 3.3
company to claim the damage. to Illustration 3.9), a spreader bar is an acceptable way to
lift the F enclosures.
3.2.3 Transportation and Unpacking

130BA832.11
Before unpacking the frequency converter, place the unit
as close as possible to the final installation site.
Remove the box and handle the frequency converter on
the pallet, as long as possible.

3.2.4 Lifting

Always lift the frequency converter in the dedicated lifting


eyes. For all E2 (IP00) enclosures, use a bar to avoid
bending the lifting holes of the frequency converter.
176FA245.10

Illustration 3.3 Recommended Lifting Method, Enclosure Size


F1 (460 V, 600 to 900 hp, 575/690 V, 900 to 1150 hp)
130BA834.11

Illustration 3.2 Recommended Lifting Method, Enclosure Size E

WARNING
The lifting bar must be able to handle the weight of the
frequency converter. See Table 3.3 for the weight of the
different enclosure sizes. Maximum diameter for bar is
2.5 cm (1 inch). The angle from the top of the frequency
Illustration 3.4 Recommended Lifting Method, Enclosure Size
converter to the lifting cable should be ≥60°.
F2 (460 V, 1000 to 1200 hp, 575/690 V, 1250 to 1350 hp)

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 9


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

130BA833.11

130BB753.10
3 3

Illustration 3.5 Recommended Lifting Method, Enclosure Size


F3 (460 V, 600 to 900 hp, 575/690 V, 900 to 1150 hp)
130BA835.11

Illustration 3.7 Recommended Lifting Method, Enclosure Type


F8

130BB688.10
Illustration 3.6 Recommended Lifting Method, Enclosure Size
F4 (460 V, 1000 to 1200 hp, 575/690 V, 1250 to 1350 hp)

Illustration 3.8 Recommended Lifting Method, Enclosure Size


F9/F10

10 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

130BB689.10
3 3

Illustration 3.9 Recommended Lifting Method, Enclosure Size


F11/F12/F13/F14

3.2.5 Mechanical Dimensions

E1 IP21 AND IP54 / UL AND NEMA TYPE 1 AND 12

130BA444.10
185 185
( 7.3 ) ( 7.3 ) 225
F 58 484 ( 8.86 )
( 2.3 ) ( 19.1)
185
72 23 ( 7.3 )
72 ( 2.8 ) ( 0.9)
( 2.8 )
27
( 1.1 )
160 2X 13
( 6.3 ) (0.5)
1043
( 41.1 )

2000
(78.74)

1551
( 61.1 ) 164
( 6.5 )
160
( 6.3 )
727
( 28.6 )
145
( 5.7 ) SIDE CABLE ENTRY
KNOCK-OFF PLATE
392 CABLE BASE
600
(23.62) ( 15.4 ) 198 BOTTOM CABLE ENTRY
494 ( 7.8 )
( 19.4 )
538
( 21.2 )

F 56
( 2.2 )

25
( 1.0 )

Ø 25
( 1.0 )

* Note airflow directions

Illustration 3.10 Dimensions, E1

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 11


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

E2 IP00 / CHASSIS

130BA445.10
139 304
(5.5) (12.0)
184 184
(7.3) (7.3)
14 184
D (1.5)

3 3 64
(2.5)
498
(19.5) 25 120
(1.0) (4.7)
2X13
(0.5) 225
(8.9)

1043
(41.1)
1547 1502
1320 (60.9) (59.1)
(52.0)

160
(6.3)
269
(10.6)
156
(6.2) 539 225
(8.9)
(21.2)
585 E
(23.0)

23
D (0.9)
25
(1.0) 25 E
(1.0)

27
(1.0)

13
(0.5)

* Note airflow directions

Illustration 3.11 Dimensions, E2

12 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


F1 IP21/54 - NEMA 1/12 F3 IP21/54 - NEMA 1/12
1

MG11F502
1400.0 225.0
(55.12) ø29.0 (8.85)
(1.14)

130BB027.10
Mechanical Installation

1
1997 225.0
(78.6) ø29 (8.85)
( 1.1)
130BB029.10

2281.4
(89.82)
2280
(89.7)

2206.4 2205
(86.8)
(86.87)
1497
(58.9)

1499.2
(59.02)
Operating Instructions

607
(23.9)

Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved.


607.0
(23.9)

1) Minimum clearance from ceiling

Table 3.1 Dimensions, F1 and F3

13
3 3
3 3

14
F2 IP21/54 - NEMA 1/12 F4 IP21/54 - NEMA 1/12
1
1804 225.0
Ø29
(71.0) (8.85)
(1.1)

130BB028.10
Mechanical Installation

1
2401 225.0
Ø29 (8.85)
(94.5) (1.1)
130BB030.10

2281
(89.8) 2280
(89.7)

2205
2206 (86.8)

(86.9) 1497
(58.9)

1499
(59.0)

604
(23.8)
Operating Instructions

Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved.


606
(23.8)

1) Minimum clearance from ceiling

Table 3.2 Dimensions, F2 and F4

MG11F502
Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

Enclosure size size E1 E2 F1 F2 F3 F4


315–450 kW at 315–450 kW at 500–710 kW at 800–1000 kW at 500–710 kW at 800–1000 kW at
400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V
(380–480 V) (380–480 V) (380–480 V) (380–480 V) (380–480 V) (380–480 V)
450–630 kW at 450–630 kW at 710–900 kW at 1000–1200 kW at 710–900 kW at 1000–1400 kW at
690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V
(525–690 V) (525–690 V) (525–690 V) (525–690 V) (525–690 V) (525–690 V) 3 3
IP 21, 54 00 21, 54 21, 54 21, 54 21, 54
NEMA Type 1/Type 12 Chassis Type 1/Type 12 Type 1/Type 12 Type 1/Type 12 Type 1/Type 12
Shipping Height 840 831 2324 2324 2324 2324
dimensions Width 2197 1705 1569 1962 2159 2559
[mm] Depth 736 736 1130 1130 1130 1130
Height 2000 1547 2204 2204 2204 2204
Frequency Width 600 585 1400 1800 2000 2400
converter Depth 494 498 606 606 606 606
dimensions Max.
[mm] weight 313 277 1004 1246 1299 1541
[kg]

Table 3.3 Mechanical Dimensions, Enclosure Sizes E and F

3.2.6 Rated Power

Enclosure size E1 E2 F1/F3 F2/F4


130BA821.10
130BA818.10

F4 F2

130BB092.11
F3 F1
130BA959.10

Enclosure IP 21/54 00 21/54 21/54


protection NEMA Type 1/Type 12 Chassis Type 1/Type 12 Type 1/Type 12
Normal overload 315–450 kW at 400 V 315–450 kW at 400 V 500–710 kW at 400 V 800–1000 kW at 400 V
rated power - (380–480 V) (380–480 V) (380–480 V) (380–480 V)
110% overload 450–630 kW at 690 V 450–630 kW at 690 V 710–900 kW at 690 V 1000–1400 kW at 690 V
torque (525-690 V) (525–690 V) (525–690 V) (525–690 V)

Table 3.4 Rated Power, Enclosure Types E and F

NOTICE
The F enclosures are available in 4 different sizes, F1, F2, F3 and F4. The F1 and F2 consist of an inverter cabinet on the
right and rectifier cabinet on the left. The F3 and F4 have an extra options cabinet left of the rectifier cabinet. The F3 is
an F1 with an extra options cabinet. The F4 is an F2 with an extra options cabinet.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 15


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

3.3 Mechanical Installation

176FA276.12
Prepare the mechanical installation of the frequency
converter carefully to ensure a proper result and to avoid
extra work during installation. To become familiar with the
space demands, start taking a close look at the mechanical 579

3 3 drawings at the end of this instruction.


(22.8)

748
3.3.1 Tools Needed (29.5) ≤105,0°

To perform the mechanical installation, the following


tools are needed:
Illustration 3.12 Space in Front of IP21/IP54 Rated Enclosure
• Drill with 10 mm or 12 mm drill. Type E1
• Tape measure.

• Wrench with relevant metric sockets (7–17 mm).

130BB003.13
Extensions to wrench.

• Sheet metal punch for conduits or cable glands 578 776


in IP21/Nema 1 and IP54 units (22.8) (30.6)

• Lifting bar to lift the unit (rod or tube max. Ø 5 Illustration 3.13 Space in Front of IP21/IP54 Rated Enclosure
mm (1 inch), able to lift minimum 400 kg (880 Type F1
lbs).

• Crane or other lifting aid to place the frequency


converter in position.

130BB004.13
• Use a Torx T50 tool to install the E1 in IP21 and
IP54 enclosure types.
2X578
[22.8] 776
[30.6]

3.3.2 General Considerations Illustration 3.14 Space in Front of IP21/IP54 Rated Enclosure
Type F3

Wire access
Ensure proper cable access, including necessary bending
allowance. As the IP00 enclosure is open to the bottom, fix
130BB005.13

cables to the back panel of the enclosure where the


frequency converter is mounted by using cable clamps. 578
[22.8]
579
[22.8]

CAUTION 624
[24.6]

Illustration 3.15 Space in Front of IP21/IP54 Rated Enclosure


All cable lugs/shoes must be mounted within the width
Type F2
of the terminal bus bar.

Space
130BB006.10

Ensure proper space above and below the frequency


converter to allow airflow and cable access. In addition, 2x579 578
(22.8) (22.8)
consider space in front of the unit to enable opening of
624
(24.6)
the panel door.
Illustration 3.16 Space in Front of IP21/IP54 Rated Enclosure
Type F4

16 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

3.3.3 Terminal Locations - E Enclosures

Terminal locations - E1
Consider the following terminal positions when designing the cable access.

176FA278.10
3 3

492[19.4]

323[12.7]

0[0.0]

195[7.7]
600[23.6]

525[20.7]

412[16.2]

300[11.8]

188[7.4]

75[3.0]

0[0.0]

409[16.1]
371[14.6]

280[11.0]

193[7.6]
155[6.1]

Illustration 3.17 IP21 (NEMA Type 1) and IP54 (NEMA Type 12) Enclosure Power Connection Positions 0[0.0]

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 17


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

176FA272.10
-R 81

3 3
A A A A 19 Nm [14 FTa

453[17.8]
9

0[0.0]
0[0.0]

55[2.2]

91[3.6]

139[5.5]

175[6.9]

Illustration 3.18 IP21 (NEMA Type 1) and IP54 (NEMA Type 12)
Enclosure Power Connection Positions (Detail B)

18 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

176FA279.11
3 3
F
E

0 [ 0.0 ]
28 [ 1.1 ]

167 [ 6.6 ]
195 [ 7.7 ]
D

0 [ 0.0 ]

A
[ 17.4 ]

[ 10.5 ]
[ 8.9 ]

51 [ 2.0 ]

0 [ 0.0 ]
226
441

266

Illustration 3.19 IP21 (NEMA Type 1) and IP54 (NEMA Type 12) Enclosure Power Connection Position of Disconnect Switch

Enclosure
Unit type Dimensions [mm]/(inch)
size
IP54/IP21 UL and NEMA1/NEMA12
250/315 kW (400 V) and 355/450-500/630
E1 396 (15.6) 267 (10.5) 332 (13.1) 397 (15.6) 528 (20.8) N/A
kW (690 V)
315/355-400/450 kW (400 V) 408 (16.1) 246 (9.7) 326 (12.8) 406 (16.0) 419 (16.5) 459 (18.1)

Table 3.5 Dimensions for Disconnect Terminal

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 19


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

Terminal locations - enclosure type E2


Take the following position of the terminals into consideration when designing the cable access.

176FA280.10
3 3
A

FASTENER TORQUE M8 9.6 Nm (7 FT-LB) FASTENER TORQUE M8 9.6 Nm (7 FT-LB)

R/L1 91 S/L2 92 T/L3 93

186[7.3]
9 U/T1 96 V/T2 97 W/T3 98

17[0.7]
0[0.0]
585[23.0]

518[20.4]

405[15.9]

293[11.5]

181[7.1]

68[2.7]

0[0.0]

409[16.1]
371[14.6]

280[11.0]

192[7.6]
154[6.1]

0[0.0]
Illustration 3.20 IP00 Enclosure Power Connection Positions

A
176FA282.10

R 81
A A A A
019Nm (14 F)
147(5.8)
9

0(0.0)
0(0.0)

47(1.9)

83(3.3)

131(5.2)

167(6.6)

Illustration 3.21 IP00 Enclosure Power Connection Positions

20 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

176FA281.11
3 3

F
E

0
[ 0.0 ]
D

0 [ 0.0 ]

0 [ 0.0 ]
Illustration 3.22 IP00 Enclosure Power Connections Positions of Disconnect Switch

NOTICE
The power cables are heavy and difficult to bend. Consider the optimum position of the frequency converter for
ensuring easy installation of the cables.
Each terminal allows use of up to 4 cables with cable lugs or use of standard box lug. Ground is connected to relevant
termination point in the frequency converter.
If lugs are wider than 39 mm, install supplied barriers on the mains input side of the disconnect.
176FA271.10

104[4.1]

35[1.4]

10[0.4]
0[0.0]
78[3.1]

40[1.6]

26[1.0]

26[1.0]
0[0.0]

0[0.0]

Illustration 3.23 Terminal in Detail

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 21


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

NOTICE
Power connections can be made to positions A or B.

Enclosure
Unit type Dimensions [mm]/(inch)
size

3 3 IP00/CHASSIS
250/315 kW (400 V) and 355/450-500/630
A B C D E F

E2 396 (15.6) 268 (10.6) 333 (13.1) 398 (15.7) 221 (8.7) N/A
kW (690 V)
315/355-400/450 kW (400 V) 408 (16.1) 239 (9.4) 319 (12.5) 399 (15.7) 113 (4.4) 153 (6.0)

Table 3.6 Dimensions for Disconnect Terminal

3.3.4 Terminal Locations - Enclosure type F

NOTICE
The F enclosures are available in 4 different sizes, F1, F2, F3 and F4. The F1 and F2 consist of an inverter cabinet on the
right and rectifier cabinet on the left. The F3 and F4 have an extra options cabinet left of the rectifier cabinet. The F3 is
an F1 with an extra options cabinet. The F4 is an F2 with an extra options cabinet.

Terminal locations - enclosure types F1 and F3


3

130BA849.13
1 2

308.3 [12.1]
253.1 [10.0]
180.3 [7.1]
5
6
.0 [.0]
44.40 [1.75]

244.40 [9.62]
54.4[2.1]

339.4 [13.4]
287.4 [11.3]
339.4 [13.4]
287.4 [11.3]
[25.0] 637.3 [25.1]
[21.7] 522.3 [20.6]
407.3 [16.0]
198.1[7.8] 169.4 [6.7]

282.1 [11.1] 284.4 [11.2]

.0 [.0]
.0 [.0]
.0 [.0]

318.1 [12.5]
234.1 [9.2]

[23.1]

[26.4]

465.6 [18.3]
465.6 [18.3]
551.0
572.1 [22.5] 587.0
635.0
671.0

4
129.1 [5.1]
204.1 [8.0]

497.1 [19.6]

1 Ground bar
2 Motor terminals
3 Brake terminals

Illustration 3.24 Terminal Locations - Inverter Cabinet - F1 and F3 (Front, Left and Right Side View). The Gland Plate is 42 mm
below .0 Level.

22 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

130BB377.10
DC ‘-’

S1
1739.1

F1
F1

805.0
765.0

3 3
1694.1
DC ‘+’
1654.1
710.0

Illustration 3.25 Terminal Locations - Regen Terminals - F1 and


F3

Terminal locations - enclosure types F2 and F4


1 2 3

130BA850.12
4

308.3 [12.14]
FASTENER TORQUE: MIO 19 Nm (14 FT -LB) FASTENER TORQUE: MIO 19 Nm (14 FT -LB) FASTENER TORQUE: MIO 19 Nm (14 FT -LB)
253.1 [9.96]
U/T1 96 V/T2 97 W/T3 98 U/T1 96 V/T2 97 W/T3 98 U/T1 96 V/T2 97 W/T3 98

180.3 [7.10]
5
6 0.0 [0.00]
287.4 [11.32]
339.4 [13.36]
0.0 [0.00]
296.4 [11.67]

431.0 [16.97]

[21.50]

[26.03]

[31.33]
[35.85]

[40.38]

0.0 [0.00]
339.4 [13.36]
287.4 [11.32]
0.0 [0.00]
66.4 [2.61]

181.4 [7.14]

1025.7
574.7 [22.63] 546.0

661.0

795.7
910.7

465.6 [18.33]
465.6 [18.33]
294.1 [11.58]
330.1 [13.00]

610.7 [24.04]
658.7 [25.93]
694.7 [27.35]

939.4 [36.98]
975.4 [38.40]
1023.4 [40.29]

1059.4 [41.71]
210.1 [8.27]
246.1 [9.69]

4
512.3 [20.17]
587.3 [23.12]

880.3 [34.66]
955.3 [37.61]
144.3 [5.68]
219.3 [8.63]

1 Ground bar

Illustration 3.26 Terminal Locations - Inverter Cabinet - F2 and F4 (Front, Left and Right Side View). The Gland Plate is 42 mm
below .0 Level.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 23


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

130BB378.10
DC ‘-’

S1
F1

F1

F1
1739.1
1203.2
1163.2
S2

S2

S2
1694.1
DC ‘+’
1654.1
3 3 1098.1

Illustration 3.27 Terminal Locations - Regen Terminals - F2 and


F4

Terminal locations - rectifier (F1, F2, F3 and F4)


1 2 3

130BA848.12
CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22
CTI25MB CTI25MB

AUXAUX AUXAUXAUX

435.5 [17.15]

343.1 [13.51]

FASTENER TORQUE: M8 9.6 Nm (7 FT-LB) FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19 Nm (14 FT-LB)

R/L1 91 S/L2 92 T/L3 93

193.9 [7.64] 4
6
FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19 Nm (14 FT-LB) FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19 Nm (14 FT-LB)
DC 89 DC 89

70.4 [2.77]
0.0 [0.00] 5
B
A

LOAD SHARE LOCATION


0.0 [0.0]

74.6 [2.9]
0.0 [0.00]
90.1 [3.55]
38.1 [1.50]
188.6 [7.42]
136.6 [5.38]

125.8 [4.95]
149.6 [5.89]
183.4 [7.22]
218.6 [8.61]
293.6 [11.56]
362.6 [14.28]
373.4 [14.70]
437.6 [17.23]
486.6 [19.16]

DIM F1/F2 F3/F4


A 380.5 [14.98] 29.4 [1.16]
B 432.5 [17.03] 81.4 [3.20]

1 Load Share Terminal (-)


2 Ground Bar
3 Load Share Terminal (+)

Illustration 3.28 Terminal Locations - Rectifier (Left Side, Front and Right Side View). The Gland Plate is 42 mm below .0 Level.

24 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

Terminal locations - options cabinet (F3 and F4)

130BA851.12
1 2 3

1031.4[40.61] 3 3
939.0[36.97]

134.6[5.30]

0.0[0.00] 0.0[1.75]
244.4[1.75]

244.4[9.62]
0.0[0.00]
75.3[2.96]
150.3[5.92]
154.0[6.06]
219.6[18.65]
294.6[11.60]
344.0[13.54]
3639[14.33]
438.9[17.28]

0.0[0.00]
76.4[3.01]
128.4[5.05]
119.0[4.69]
171.0[6.73]
1 Ground bar

Illustration 3.29 Terminal Locations - Options Cabinet (Left Side, Front and Right Side View). The Gland Plate is 42 mm below .0
Level.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 25


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

Terminal locations - options cabinet with circuit breaker/moulded case switch (F3 and F4)

130BA852.11
3 3

532.9 [20.98]

436.9 [17.20]

134.6 [5.30]

0.0 [0.00] 0.0 [0.00]


44.4 [1.75]

244.4 [9.62]

3 5
0.0 [0.00]

104.3 [4.11]
179.3 [7.06]
154.0 [6.06]
219.6 [8.65]
294.6 [11.60]
344.0 [13.54]
334.8 [13.18]
409.8 [16.14]

0.0 [0.00]
2 4

1 Ground bar

Illustration 3.30 Terminal Locations - Options Cabinet with Circuit Breaker/Moulded Case Switch (Left Side, Front and Right Side
View). The Gland Plate is 42 mm below .0 Level.

Power size 2 3 4 5
500 kW (480 V), 710–800 kW (690 V) 34.9 86.9 122.2 174.2
560–1000 kW (480 V), 900–1400 kW (690 V) 46.3 98.3 119.0 171.0

Table 3.7 Dimensions for Terminal

3.3.5 Cooling and Airflow Duct cooling


A dedicated option has been developed to optimise instal-
Cooling lation of IP00/chassis frequency converters in Rittal TS8
Cooling can be obtained in different ways: enclosures. The option uses the fan of the frequency
converter for forced air cooling of the backchannel. Air
• By using the cooling ducts at the bottom and top
that escapes from the top of enclosure could be ducted
of the unit.
outside a facility. Then heat losses from the backchannel
• By adding and removing air from the back of the are not dissipated within the control room, reducing air-
unit. conditioning requirements of the facility.
See chapter 3.4.1 Installation of Duct Cooling Kit in Rittal
• By combining the cooling possibilities.
Enclosures, for further information.
Back cooling
The backchannel air can also be ventilated in and out the
back of a Rittal TS8 enclosure. Such back cooling offers a
solution where the backchannel could take air from
outside the facility and return the heat losses outside the
facility, thus reducing air-conditioning requirements.

26 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

CAUTION NOTICE
Install a door fan on the enclosure to remove the heat The fan runs for the following reasons:
losses not contained in the backchannel of the frequency • AMA.
converter and any additional losses generated from
other components installed inside the enclosure. • DC Hold.
Calculate the total required airflow to select the
appropriate fans. Some enclosure manufacturers offer
• Pre-Mag.
3 3
software for performing the calculations (Rittal Therm
• DC Brake.

software). If the frequency converter is the only heat- • 60% of nominal current is exceeded.
generating component in the enclosure, the minimum • Specific heat sink temperature is exceeded
airflow required at an ambient temperature of 45 °C for (power size dependent).
the E2 frequency converter is 782 m3/h (460 cfm).
• Specific power card ambient temperature is
exceeded (power size dependent).
Airflow
Provide sufficient airflow over the heat sink. The flow rate • Specific control card ambient temperature is
exceeded.
is shown in Table 3.8.

Enclosure Door fan/ Heat sink fan Once the fan is started, it runs for minimum 10 minutes.
protection Enclosure size top fan
rating airflow External ducts
E1 P315T4, 340 m3/h 1105 m3/h If extra duct work is added externally to the Rittal cabinet,
P450T7, (200 cfm) (650 cfm) calculate the pressure drop in the ducting. Use the
IP21/NEMA 1 P500T7 following charts to derate the frequency converter
IP54/NEMA 12 E1 P355- 340 m3/h 1445 m3/h according to the pressure drop.
P450T4, P560- (200 cfm) (850 cfm) (%)

130BB010.10
P630T7 90
80
IP21/NEMA 1 F1, F2, F3 and 700 m3/h 985 m3/h
70
F4 (412 cfm)* (580 cfm)*
60
Drive Derating

IP54/NEMA 12 F1, F2, F3 and 525 m3/h 985 m3/h 50


F4 (309 cfm)* (580 cfm)* 40
30
E2 P315T4, 255 m3/h 1105 m3/h
20
P450T7, (150 cfm) (650 cfm) 10
P500T7 0
IP00/Chassis 0 0 0.1 3.6 9.8 21.5 43.4 76 147.1 237.5 278.9
E2 P355- 255 m3/h 1445 m3/h Pressure Change (Pa)

P450T4, P560- (150 cfm) (850 cfm) Illustration 3.31 E Enclosure Derating vs. Pressure Change
P630T7 (Small Fan), P315T4 and P450T7-P500T7
* Airflow per fan. Enclosure type F contains multiple fans. Frequency Converter Airflow: 650 cfm (1105 m3/h)

Table 3.8 Heat Sink Airflow


(%)
130BB011.10

90
80
70
60
Drive Derating

50
40
30
20
10
0
0 0.2 0.6 2.2 5.8 11.4 18.1 30.8 69.5 152.8 210.8
Pressure Change (Pa)

Illustration 3.32 E Enclosure Derating vs. Pressure Change


(Large Fan), P355T4-P450T4 and P560T7-P630T7
Frequency Converter Airflow: 850 cfm (1445 m3/h)

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 27


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

(%) Cable entries viewed from the bottom of the frequency

130BB190.10
90
80
converter - 1) Mains side 2) Motor side
1 2

176FA289.12
70
35
60
Drive Derating

50
40

3 3 30
20
10
62.5
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225
Pressure Change 202.8
Illustration 3.33 F1, F2, F3, F4 Enclosures Derating vs. Pressure 130.0

Change
Frequency Converter Airflow: 580 cfm (985 m3/h)
98.6

3.3.6 Gland/Conduit Entry - IP21 (NEMA 1)


350
and IP54 (NEMA12)
Illustration 3.35 Enclosure Size E1
Cables are connected through the gland plate from the
bottom. Remove the plate and plan where to place the
entry for the glands or conduits. Prepare holes in the
Enclosure sizes F1-F4: Cable entries viewed from the
marked area in Illustration 3.35 to Illustration 3.39.
bottom of the frequency converter - 1) Place conduits in
marked areas
NOTICE 668.3

130BA837.12
593.0
(26.311) (23.346)
The gland plate must be fitted to the frequency 37.7 1
(1.485) 460.0
converter to ensure the specified protection degree, as (18.110)
well as ensuring proper cooling of the unit. If the gland
plate is not mounted, the frequency converter may trip 216.5
(8.524) 199.5
(7.854)
on Alarm 69, Pwr. Card Temp 535.0
(21.063)
281.8 258.5
(11.096) (10.177)
130BB073.10

533.0 35.5
36.2 (20.984) (1.398)
(1.425) 595.8
(23.457) 1328.8
(52.315)
Illustration 3.36 Enclosure Size F1

Illustration 3.34 Example of Proper Installation of Gland Plate

28 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

3.4 Field Installation of Options


3.4.1 Installation of Duct Cooling Kit in

130BA841.12
Rittal Enclosures
655.9
25.825 994.3
This section deals with the installation of IP00/chassis
3 3
[39.146]
37.7 460.0
[1.485] [18.110] enclosed frequency converters with duct work cooling kits
in Rittal enclosures. In addition to the enclosure, a 200 mm
216.5 199.5 base/plinth is required.
535.0 [8.524] [7.854]
[21.063]
281.8 258.2
[11.096] [10.167]

176FA252.10
35.5 533.0
[1.398] 36.2 [20.984] 1
594.8
[1.425] [23.417] 1727.8
[68.024]

Illustration 3.37 Enclosure Size F2

1265.3 593.0
130BA843.12

(49.815) (23.346)
634.7
(24.989)
37.7
(1.485) 2X 460.0
(18.110)

2X 216.5 199.5
535.0 (8.524) (7.854)
(21.063)
2X 281.3 258.5
(11.075) (10.177)
533.0
35.5 (20.984)
(1.398) 597.0
(23.504) 1
1130.0
36.2 (44.488)
(1.425) 1192.8
(46.961)
1925.8
(75.819)

Illustration 3.38 Enclosure Size F3


130BA839.10

1252.8 994.3
634.7 (24.989) (49.321) (39.146)
37.7
(1.485) 2X 460.0
(18.110)
2X 216.5
(8.524) 199.5
535.0 (7.854)
(21.063)
2X 281.8 258.2
(11.096) (10.167)

35.5 533 (20.984)


(1.398) 597.0 (23.504)
36.2 1130.0 (44.488) 1
(1.425)
1191.8 (46.921)
2324.8 (91.528)

Illustration 3.39 Enclosure Size F4


Illustration 3.40 Installation of IP00 in Rittal TS8 Enclosure.

The minimum enclosure dimension is:


• E2 enclosure: Depth 600 mm and width 800 mm.
The maximum depth and width are as required by the
installation. When using multiple frequency converters in 1
enclosure, mount each frequency converter on its own

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 29


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

back panel and support it along the mid-section of the Using these kits as described removes 85% of the losses
panel. These duct work kits do not support the “in frame” via the backchannel using the frequency converter’s main
mounting of the panel (see Rittal TS8 catalogue for heat sink fan. Remove the remaining 15% via the enclosure
details). The duct work cooling kits listed in Table 3.9 are door.
suitable for use only with IP00/Chassis frequency
converters in Rittal TS8 IP20 and UL and NEMA 1 and IP54, NOTICE
3 3 and UL and NEMA 12 enclosures.
See the Top-only Back-Channel Cooling Kit Instruction,
175R1107, for further information.
CAUTION
For the E2 enclosures, it is important to mount the plate Ordering information
at the absolute rear of the Rittal enclosure due to the
weight of the frequency converter.
• Enclosure type E2: 176F1776

3.4.3 Installation of Top and Bottom Covers


CAUTION for Rittal Enclosures
Install a door fan on the enclosure to remove the heat
losses not contained in the backchannel of the frequency The top and bottom covers, installed onto IP00 frequency
converter and any additional losses generated from converters, direct the heat sink cooling air in and out the
other components installed inside the enclosure. back of the frequency converter. The kits are applicable to
Calculate the total required airflow to select the enclosure type E2, IP00. These kits are designed and tested
appropriate fans. Some enclosure manufacturers offer to be used with IP00/Chassis frequency converters in Rittal
software for performing the calculations (Rittal Therm TS8 enclosures.
software). If the frequency converter is the only heat-
generating component in the enclosure, the minimum Notes:
airflow required at an ambient temperature of 45 °C for 1. If external duct work is added to the exhaust
the E2 frequency converter is 782 m3/h (460 cfm). path of the frequency converter, extra back
pressure reduces the cooling of the frequency
Rittal TS-8 Enclosure Enclosure size E2 part no. converter. Derate the frequency converter to
1800 mm Not possible accommodate the reduced cooling. First,
2000 mm 176F1850 calculate the pressure drop, then refer to
2200 mm 176F0299
Illustration 3.31 to Illustration 3.33.
2. A door fan is required on the enclosure to
Table 3.9 Ordering Information remove the heat losses not contained in the
backchannel of the frequency converter and any
External ducts additional losses generated from other
If extra duct work is added externally to the Rittal cabinet, components installed inside the enclosure.
calculate the pressure drop in the ducting. See Calculate the total required airflow to select the
chapter 3.3.5 Cooling and Airflow for further information. appropriate fans. Some enclosure manufacturers
offer software for performing the calculations
3.4.2 Installation of Top-only Duct Cooling (Rittal Therm software).
Kit If the frequency converter is the only heat-
generating component in the enclosure, the
This description is for the installation of the top section minimum airflow required at an ambient
only of the backchannel cooling kits available for enclosure temperature of 45 °C for the enclosure size E2
size E2. In addition to the enclosure, a 200 mm vented frequency converter is 782 m3/h (460 cfm).
pedestal is required.
The minimum enclosure depth is 500 mm (600 mm for
NOTICE
enclosure size E2) and the minimum enclosure width is See the instruction for Top and Bottom Covers - Rittal
600 mm (800 mm for enclosure size E2). The maximum Enclosure, 177R0076, for further information.
depth and width are as required by the installation. When
using multiple frequency converters in 1 enclosure, mount Ordering information
each frequency converter on its own back panel and
support it along the mid-section of the panel. The
• Enclosure size E2: 176F1783

backchannel cooling kits are similar in construction for all


enclosures. The E2 kit is mounted “in frame” for extra
support of the frequency converter.

30 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

3.4.4 Installation of Top and Bottom Covers 3.4.5 Outside Installation/NEMA 3R Kit for
Rittal Enclosures
Top and bottom covers can be installed on enclosure size
E2. These kits direct the backchannel airflow in and out the

176FT261.10
back of the frequency converter instead of directing the
airflow in at the bottom and out at the top of the
frequency converter (when the frequency converters are 3 3
being mounted directly on a wall or inside a welded
enclosure).

Notes:
1. If external duct work is added to the exhaust
path of the frequency converter, extra back
pressure reduces the cooling of the frequency
converter. Derate the frequency converter to
accommodate the reduced cooling. Calculate the
pressure drop, then refer to Illustration 3.31 to
Illustration 3.33.
2. A door fan is required on the enclosure to
remove the heat losses not contained in the
backchannel of the frequency converter and any
additional losses generated from other
components installed inside the enclosure.
Calculate the total required airflow to select the
appropriate fans. Some enclosure manufacturers
offer software for performing the calculations
(Rittal Therm software).
If the frequency converter is the only heat-
generating component in the enclosure, the
Illustration 3.41 Rittal Enclosure Size E2
minimum airflow required at an ambient
temperature of 45 °C for the enclosure size E2
frequency converter is 782 m3/h (460 cfm).
This section is for the installation of NEMA 3R kits available
NOTICE for the frequency converter enclosure size E2. These kits
are designed and tested to be used with IP00/Chassis
See the Top and Bottom Covers Only Instruction,
versions of these enclosure sizes in Rittal TS8 NEMA 3R or
175R1106, for further information.
NEMA 4 enclosures. The NEMA 3R enclosure is an outdoor
enclosure that provides a degree of protection against rain
Ordering information
and ice. The NEMA 4 enclosure is an outdoor enclosure
• Enclosure size E2: 176F1861 that provides a greater degree of protection against
weather and hosed water.
The minimum enclosure depth is 500 mm (600 mm for
enclosure size E2) and the kit is designed for a 600 mm
(800 mm for enclosure size E2) wide enclosure. Other
enclosure widths are possible, however extra Rittal
hardware is required. The maximum depth and width are
as required by the installation.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 31


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

NOTICE 3.4.7 Installation of IP00 to IP20 Kits


Frequency converters in enclosure type E2 require no
derating. The kits can be installed on enclosure size E2 frequency
converters (IP00).

NOTICE
3 3 Install a door fan on the enclosure to remove the heat CAUTION
losses not contained in the backchannel of the frequency See the instruction for Installation of IP20 Kits, 175R1108,
converter and any additional losses generated from for further information.
other components installed inside the enclosure.
Calculate the total required airflow to select the Ordering information
appropriate fans. Some enclosure manufacturers offer
software for performing the calculations (Rittal Therm
• Enclosure size E2: 176F1884

software). If the frequency converter is the only heat-


generating component in the enclosure, the minimum 3.4.8 Installation of IP00 E2 Cable Clamp
airflow required at an ambient temperature of 45 °C for Bracket
the E2 frequency converter is 782 m3/h (460 cfm).
The motor cable clamp brackets can be installed on
enclosure types E2 (IP00).
Ordering information

• Enclosure size E2: 176F1884


NOTICE
See the instruction for Cable Clamp Bracket Kit, 175R1109,
3.4.6 Outside Installation/NEMA 3R Kit for
for further information.
Industrial Enclosures

The kits are available for the enclosure size E2. These kits Ordering information
are designed and tested to be used with IP00/Chassis • Enclosure size E2: 176F1745
frequency converters in welded-box construction
enclosures with an environmental rating of NEMA 3R or 3.4.9 Installation of Mains Shield for
NEMA 4. The NEMA 3R enclosure is a dust-tight, rain-tight, Frequency Converters
ice-resistant, outdoor enclosure. The NEMA 4 enclosure is a
dust-tight and water-tight enclosure.
This section describes the installation of a mains shield for
This kit has been tested and complies with UL environ-
the frequency converter series with enclosure size E1. It is
mental rating Type 3R.
not possible to install in the IP00/Chassis versions as they
have included a metal cover as standard. These shields
NOTICE meet VBG-4 requirements.
Enclosure size E2 frequency converters require no
derating when installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure. Ordering information:

• Enclosure size E1: 176F1851


NOTICE
See the instruction for Outside Installation/NEMA 3R Kit
for Industrial Enclosures, 175R1068, for further
information.

Ordering information

• Enclosure size E2: 176F0298

32 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

3.4.10 Enclosure Size F USB Extension Kit NOTICE


For further information, see the Instruction Sheet,
A USB extension cable can be installed into the door of F- 177R0091.
frame frequency converters.

Ordering information:

• 176F1784
3 3
3.4.11 Installation of Input Plate Options

This section describes the field installation of input option kits available for frequency converters in all E enclosures.
Do not attempt to remove RFI filters from input plates. Damage may occur to RFI filters if they are removed from the input
plate.

NOTICE
2 different types of RFI filters are available, depending on the input plate combination and the RFI filters
interchangeable. Field installable kits are, in certain cases, the same for all voltages.

380–480 V Fuses Disconnect fuses RFI RFI fuses RFI disconnect


380-500 V fuses
E1 FC 102/FC 202: 315 kW 176F0253 176F0255 176F0257 176F0258 176F0260
FC 302: 250 kW
FC 102/FC 202: 355–450 176F0254 176F0256 176F0257 176F0259 176F0262
kW
FC 302: 315–400 kW

Table 3.10 Fuses, Enclosure Size E1 380-500 V

525–690 V Fuses Disconnect fuses RFI RFI fuses RFI disconnect


fuses
E1 FC 102/FC 202: 450– 176F0253 176F0255 NA NA NA
500 kW
FC 302: 355–400 kW
FC 102/FC 202: 560– 176F0254 176F0258 NA NA NA
630 kW
FC 302: 500–560 kW

Table 3.11 Fuses, Enclosure Size E1 525-690 V

NOTICE
For further information, see the Instruction Installation of Field Installable Kits for VLT Drives.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 33


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

3.4.12 Installation of E Load Share Option requires VLT PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 and VLT
Extended Relay Card MCB 113.
The load share option can be installed on enclosure size RCD (residual current device)
E2. To monitor ground fault currents in grounded and high-
resistance grounded systems (TN and TT systems in IEC

3 3 Ordering information

• Enclosure type E1/E2: 176F1843


terminology), use the core balance method. There is a pre-
warning (50% of main alarm setpoint) and a main alarm
setpoint. Associated with each setpoint is an SPDT alarm
3.5 Enclosure Type F Panel Options relay for external use. It requires an external “window-type”
current transformer (supplied and installed by customer).
3.5.1 Enclosure Type F Options
• Integrated into the frequency converter’s safe-
stop circuit.
Space heaters and thermostat
Mounted on the cabinet interior of enclosure size F • IEC 60755 Type B device monitors AC, pulsed DC,
frequency converters, space heaters controlled via and pure DC ground fault currents.
automatic thermostat help control humidity inside the
enclosure. This control extends the lifetime of frequency
• LED bar graph indicator of the ground fault
current level from 10–100% of the setpoint.
converter components in damp environments. The
thermostat default settings turn on the heaters at 10 °C • Fault memory.
(50 °F) and turn them off at 15.6 °C (60 °F). • [TEST/RESET].
Cabinet light with power outlet IRM (insulation resistance monitor)
A light mounted on the cabinet interior of enclosure size F IRM monitors the insulation resistance in ungrounded
frequency converters increases visibility during servicing systems (IT systems in IEC terminology) between the
and maintenance. The housing light includes a power system phase conductors and ground. There is an ohmic
outlet, which temporarily powers tools or other devices, pre-warning and a main alarm setpoint for the insulation
available in 2 voltages: level. Associated with each setpoint is an SPDT alarm relay
for external use.
• 230 V, 50 Hz, 2.5 A, CE/ENEC

• 120 V, 60 Hz, 5 A, UL/cUL NOTICE


Transformer tap set-up Only 1 insulation resistance monitor can be connected to
If the cabinet light and outlet and/or the space heaters each ungrounded (IT) system.
and thermostat are installed, transformer T1 requires its
taps to be set to the proper input voltage. A 380-480/500 • Integrated into the frequency converter’s safe-
V frequency converter is initially set to the 525 V tap, and stop circuit.
a 525–690 V frequency converter is set to the 690 V tap.
• LCD display of the ohmic value of the insulation
This setting ensures that no overvoltage of secondary resistance.
equipment occurs if the tap is not changed before power
is applied. See Table 3.12 to set the proper tap at terminal • Fault memory.
T1 located in the rectifier cabinet. For location in the • [INFO], [TEST], and [RESET].
frequency converter, see Illustration 4.1.
IEC emergency stop with Pilz safety relay
Input voltage range [V] Tap to select IEC emergency stop with Pilz safety relay includes a
380–440 400 V redundant 4-wire emergency-stop push-button mounted
441–490 460 V on the front of the enclosure and a Pilz relay that monitors
491–550 525 V it with the frequency converter’s safe-stop circuit and the
551–625 575 V mains contactor located in the options cabinet.
626–660 660 V STO + Pilz Relay
661–690 690 V STO + Pilz Relay provides a solution for the "Emergency
Stop" option without the contactor in F enclosure
Table 3.12 Setting of Transformer Tap frequency converters.

NAMUR terminals Manual motor starters


NAMUR is an international association of automation Manual motor starters provide 3-phase power for electric
technology-users in the process industries, primarily blowers often required for larger motors. Power for the
chemical and pharmaceutical industries in Germany. starters is provided from the load side of any supplied
Selecting this option provides terminals organised and contactor, circuit breaker, or disconnect switch. Power is
labelled to the specifications of the NAMUR standard for fused before each motor start, and is off when the
frequency converter input and output terminals. This incoming power to the frequency converter is off. Up to 2

34 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions

starters are allowed (one if a 30 A, fuse-protected circuit is


ordered). The motor starters are integrated into the
frequency converter’s safe-stop circuit.
Unit features include:

• Operation switch (on/off).

• Short circuit and overload protection with test


function.
3 3
• Manual reset function.
30 A, fuse-protected terminals

• 3-phase power matching incoming mains voltage


for powering auxiliary customer equipment.

• Not available if 2 manual motor starters are


selected.

• Terminals are off when the incoming power to


the frequency converter is off.

• Power for the fused protected terminals are


provided from the load side of any supplied
contactor, circuit breaker, or disconnect switch.
24 V DC power supply

• 5 A, 120 W, 24 V DC.

• Protected against output overcurrent, overload,


short circuits, and overtemperature.

• For powering customer-supplied accessory


devices such as sensors, PLC I/O, contactors,
temperature probes, indicator lights, and/or other
electronic hardware.

• Diagnostics include a dry DC-ok contact, a green


DC-ok LED, and a red overload LED.
External temperature monitoring
External temperature monitoring, designed for monitoring
temperatures of external system components, such as the
motor windings and/or bearings. It includes 5 universal
input modules. The modules are integrated into the
frequency converter’s safe-stop circuit and can be
monitored via a fieldbus network (requires the purchase of
a separate module/bus coupler).
Universal inputs (5)
Signal types:
• RTD inputs (including PT100), 3-wire or 4-wire.
• Thermocouple.

• Analog current or analog voltage.


Extra features:
• 1 universal output, configurable for analog
voltage or analog current.

• 2 output relays (N.O.).

• Dual-line LC display and LED diagnostics.

• Sensor lead wire break, short circuit, and incorrect


polarity detection.

• Interface set-up software.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 35


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

4 Electrical Installation

4.1 Electrical Installation Screening of cables


Avoid installation with twisted screen ends (pigtails). They
4.1.1 Power Connections spoil the screening effect at higher frequencies. If it is
necessary to break the screen to install a motor isolator or
Cabling and fusing motor contactor, continue the screen at the lowest
4 4 NOTICE possible HF impedance.

Cables in General Connect the motor cable screen to both the decoupling
All cabling must comply with national and local plate of the frequency converter and to the metal housing
regulations on cable cross-sections and ambient of the motor.
temperature. UL applications require 75 °C copper Make the screen connections with the largest possible
conductors. 75 °C and 90 °C copper conductors are surface area (cable clamp). These connections are made by
thermally acceptable for the frequency converter to use using the supplied installation devices within the
in non-UL applications. frequency converter.
Cable length and cross-section
The power cable connections are located as shown in The frequency converter has been EMC-tested with a given
Illustration 4.1. Dimensioning of cable cross-section must cable length. Keep the motor cable as short as possible to
be done in accordance with the current ratings and local reduce the noise level and leakage currents.
legislation. See chapter 7 General Specifications for details.
Switching frequency
When frequency converters are used together with sine-
If the frequency converter does not have built-in fuses, use
wave filters to reduce the acoustic noise from a motor, set
the recommended fuses to protect it. See
the switching frequency according to 14-01 Switching
chapter 4.1.15 Fuse Specifications for recommended fuses.
Frequency.
Always ensure that proper fusing is made according to
local regulation. Term. 96 97 98 99
numb
The mains connection is fitted to the mains switch if this er
switch is included. U V W PE1) Motor voltage 0–100% of mains
voltage.
3 wires out of motor.
130BA026.10

U1 V1 W1 Delta-connected.
PE1)
3 Phase W2 U2 V2 6 wires out of motor.
91 (L1)
power U1 V1 W1 PE1) Star-connected U2, V2, W2
92 (L2)
input U2, V2 and W2 to be intercon-
93 (L3) nected separately.
95 PE
Table 4.1 Motor Terminals
1) Protected Ground Connection
Illustration 4.1 Power Cable Connections

NOTICE
In motors without phase insulation paper or other
NOTICE insulation reinforcement suitable for operation with
The motor cable must be screened/armoured. If an voltage supply (such as a frequency converter), fit a sine-
unscreened/unarmoured cable is used, some EMC wave filter on the frequency converter output.
requirements are not complied with. To comply with
EMC emission specifications, use a screened/armoured
motor cable. For more information, see EMC specifi-
cations in the product-related design guide.

See chapter 7 General Specifications for correct


dimensioning of motor cable cross-section and length.

36 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

175ZA114.11

130BB020.10
Motor Motor 6
U2 V2 W2 U2 V2 W2

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
7
1

FC FC 8

4 4
96 97 98 96 97 98

2
Illustration 4.2 Star/Delta Connections

130BB019.10
6
3

7
1

3 10
9
5
Illustration 4.4 Compact IP00 (Chassis) with Disconnect, Fuse
4 and RFI Filter, Enclosure Type E2

10

Illustration 4.3 Compact IP21 (NEMA 1) and IP54 (NEMA 12)


Enclosure Type E1

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 37


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

1) AUX relay 5) Load sharing


01 02 03 -DC +DC
04 05 06 88 89
2) Temp switch 6) SMPS fuse (see Table 4.18 for part number)
106 104 105 7) Fan fuse (see Table 4.19 for part number)
3) Mains 8) AUX fan
R S T 100 101 102 103
91 92 93 L1 L2 L1 L2

4 4 4)
L1
Brake
L2 L3 9)
10)
Mains ground
Motor
-R +R U V W
81 82 96 97 98
T1 T2 T3

Table 4.2 Legend to Illustration 4.3 and Illustration 4.4


176FA259.11

:ASTEN
ER TO
RQUE:
R/L1 MM8
91 9.6 N
m (7FT
-LB)
S/L2 ASTEN
92 ER TO
RQUE:
M10
19
T/L3 Nm (14FT-LB)
93

W/
T3
98

1 Ground terminals

Illustration 4.5 Position of Ground Terminals IP00, Enclosure


Type E

38 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

130BA860.10
C J3
FUSE ONNECT

4 4

CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22


CTI25MB CTI25MB

10

4
FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19Nm (14 FT -LB) FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19Nm (14 FT -LB)
+DC 89 +DC 89

1) 24 V DC, 5 A 5) Load sharing


T1 output taps -DC +DC
Temp switch 88 89
106 104 105 6) Control transformer fuses (2 or 4 pieces) (see Table 4.22 for part numbers)
2) Manual motor starters 7) SMPS fuse (see Table 4.18 for part numbers)
3) 30 A fuse-protected power terminals 8) Manual motor controller fuses (3 or 6 pieces) (see Table 4.20 for part numbers)
4) Mains 9) Mains fuses, enclosure types F1 and F2 (3 pieces) (see Table 4.12 to Table 4.16 for
part numbers)
R S T 10) 30 Amp fuse-protected power fuses
L1 L2 L3

Illustration 4.6 Rectifier Cabinet, Enclosure Types F1, F2, F3 and F4

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 39


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

1 2

130BA861.11
4 4 4, 8, 9

1) External temperature monitoring 6) Motor


2) AUX relay U V W
01 02 03 96 97 98
04 05 06 T1 T2 T3
3) NAMUR 7) NAMUR fuse (see Table 4.23 for part numbers)
4) AUX fan 8) Fan fuses (See Table 4.19 for part numbers)
100 101 102 103 9) SMPS fuses (See Table 4.18 for part numbers)
L1 L2 L1 L2
5) Brake
-R +R
81 82

Illustration 4.7 Inverter Cabinet, Enclosure Types F1 and F3

40 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

130BA862.12
2 3

6 4 4

FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19 Nm (14 FT-LB) FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19 Nm (14 FT-LB) FASTENER TORQUE: M10 19 Nm (14 FT-LB)
U/T1 96 V/T2 97 W/T3 98 U/T1 96 V/T2 97 W/T3 98 U/T1 96 V/T2 97 W/T3 98

1) External temperature monitoring 6) Motor


2) AUX relay U V W
01 02 03 96 97 98
04 05 06 T1 T2 T3
3) NAMUR 7) NAMUR fuse (see Table 4.23 for part numbers)
4) AUX fan 8) Fan fuses (see Table 4.19 for part numbers)
100 101 102 103 9) SMPS fuses (see Table 4.18 for part numbers)
L1 L2 L1 L2
5) Brake
-R +R
81 82

Illustration 4.8 Inverter Cabinet, Enclosure Types F2 and F4

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 41


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

1 6

130BA853.12
4
7

4 4
2

1) Pilz relay terminal 4) Safety relay coil fuse with PILZ relay (see Table 4.24 for part
numbers)
2) RCD or IRM terminal
3) Mains 5) Mains fuses, F3 and F4 (3 pieces) (see Table 4.12 to Table 4.16 for
part numbers)
R S T
91 92 93 6) Contactor relay coil (230 VAC). N/C and N/O Aux contacts
(customer supplied)
L1 L2 L3 7) Circuit breaker shunt trip control terminals (230 V AC or 230 V DC)

Illustration 4.9 Options Cabinet, Enclosure Types F3 and F4

42 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

4.1.2 Grounding Set 14-50 RFI Filter to [ON]

• If optimum EMC performance is needed.


To obtain electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), consider
the following during installation: • Parallel motors are connected.

• The motor cable length is above 25 m.


• Safety grounding: For safety reasons, ground the In OFF, the internal RFI capacities (filter capacitors)
frequency converter appropriately due to its high between the enclosure and the intermediate circuit are cut
leakage current. Apply local safety regulations. off to avoid damage to the intermediate circuit and to
• High-frequency grounding: Keep the ground wire
connections as short as possible.
reduce the ground capacity currents (according to IEC
61800-3). 4 4
Also refer to the Application Note VLT on IT Mains. It is
Connect the different ground systems at the lowest
important to use isolation monitors suited for power
possible conductor impedance. The lowest possible
electronics (IEC 61557-8).
conductor impedance is obtained by keeping the
conductor as short as possible and by using the greatest
possible surface area. 4.1.5 Torque
The metal cabinets of the different devices are mounted
on the cabinet rear plate using the lowest possible HF Tighten all electrical connections with the correct torque.
impedance. Different HF voltages are then avoided for the Too low or too high torque results in a bad electrical
individual devices. Also the risk of radio interference connection. To ensure correct torque, use a torque wrench.
currents running in connection cables that may be used
between the devices is avoided. The radio interference has

176FA247.12
been reduced.
To obtain a low HF impedance, use the fastening bolts of
the devices as HF connection to the rear plate. It is
necessary to remove insulating paint or similar from the
fastening points. T/L3
93
92
S/L2
91
R/L1

4.1.3 Extra Protection (RCD)


89
+DC W/T3
If local safety regulations are complied with, ELCB relays, -DC 8
8
V/T2
97
96
multiple protective earthing, or grounding can be used as U/T1

extra protection.

A ground fault may cause a DC component to develop in


the fault current.

If ELCB relays are used, observe local regulations. Relays


Nm/in-lbs
must be suitable for the protection of 3-phase equipment
with a bridge rectifier and for a brief discharge on power- Illustration 4.10 Tighten Bolts with a Torque Wrench
up.

See also Special Conditions in the product relevant design Enclosure Terminal Torque [Nm] (in-lbs) Bolt size
guide. sizes
E Mains
19–40
Motor M10
4.1.4 RFI Switch (168–354)
Load sharing
Brake 8.5–20.5
Mains supply isolated from ground M8
(75–181)
If the frequency converter is supplied from an isolated
mains source (IT mains, floating delta and grounded delta)
or TT/TN-S mains with grounded leg, turn off the RFI
switch via 14-50 RFI Filter on both the frequency converter
and the filter. For further reference, see IEC 364-3.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 43


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

Enclosure Terminal Torque [Nm] (in-lbs) Bolt size • Terminal U/T1/96 connected

175HA036.11
Motor
U2 V2 W2

sizes to U-phase
U1 V1 W1
F Mains 19–40
M10 • Terminal V/T2/97 connected
Motor (168–354) to V-phase FC
Load sharing 19–40
(168-354)
M10 • Terminal W/T3/98 96 97 98

connected to W-phase
Brake 8.5-20.5 Motor
U2 V2 W2
Regen (75-181) M8
8.5-20.5 M8
4 4
U1 V1 W1

(75-181)
FC

Table 4.3 Torque for Terminals 96 97 98

4.1.6 Screened Cables


Table 4.5 Wiring for Motor Directions

WARNING The direction of rotation can be changed by switching 2 phases in


the motor cable or by changing the setting of 4-10 Motor Speed
Danfoss recommends using screened cables between the Direction.
LCL filter and the frequency converter. Unshielded cables
can be used between the transformer and the LCL filter To perform motor rotation check, follow the steps in
input side. parameter 1-28 Motor Rotation Check.

Make sure to connect screened and armoured cables F enclosure requirements


properly to ensure high EMC immunity and low emissions. F1/F3 requirements
Attach an equal number of wires to both inverter module
The connection can be made using either cable glands terminals. To obtain an equal number, motor phase cable
or clamps. quantities must be multiples of 2, resulting in 2, 4, 6, or 8
(1 cable is not allowed). The cables are required to be of
• EMC cable glands: Available cable glands can be
used to ensure optimum EMC connection. equal length within 10% between the inverter module
terminals and the first common point of a phase. The
• EMC cable clamp: Clamps allowing easy recommended common point is the motor terminals.
connection are supplied with the frequency
converter. F2/F4 requirements: Attach an equal number of wires to
both inverter module terminals. To obtain an equal
number, motor phase cable quantities must be multiples
4.1.7 Motor Cable of 3, resulting in 3, 6, 9, or 12 (1 or 2 cables are not
allowed). The wires are required to be of equal length
Connect the motor to terminals U/T1/96, V/T2/97, W/T3/98.
within 10% between the inverter module terminals and the
Ground to terminal 99. All types of 3-phase asynchronous
first common point of a phase. The recommended
standard motors can be used with a frequency converter.
common point is the motor terminals.
The factory setting is clockwise rotation with the frequency
converter output connected as follows: Output junction box requirements
The length, minimum 2.5 m, and quantity of cables must
be equal from each inverter module to the common
Terminal number Function
terminal in the junction box.
96, 97, 98 Mains U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
99 Ground NOTICE
If a retrofit application requires an unequal number of
Table 4.4 Mains Terminals
wires per phase, consult the factory for requirements
and documentation, or use the top/bottom entry side
enclosure option.

44 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

4.1.8 Brake Cable for Frequency Converters NOTICE


with Factory-installed Brake Chopper If the temperature of the brake resistor becomes too
Option high and the thermal switch drops out, the frequency
converter stops braking. The motor starts coasting.
(Only standard with letter B in position 18 of product type
code).
4.1.10 Load Sharing
Use a screened connection cable to the brake resistor. The
Terminal Function
maximum length from the frequency converter to the DC
bar is limited to 25 m (82 ft).
number
88, 89 Load sharing
4 4
Terminal number Function Table 4.8 Terminals for Load Sharing
81, 82 Brake resistor terminals
The connection cable must be screened and the maximum
Table 4.6 Brake Resistor Terminals length from the frequency converter to the DC bar is
limited to 25 m (82 ft).
The connection cable to the brake resistor must be Load sharing enables linking of the DC intermediate
screened. Connect the screen to the conductive back plate circuits of several frequency converters.
on the frequency converter and to the metal cabinet of
the brake resistor with cable clamps.
Size the brake cable cross-section to match the brake WARNING
torque. See also the Instructions Brake Resistor and Brake Voltages up to 1099 V DC may occur on the terminals.
Resistors for Horizontal Applications for further information Load sharing requires extra equipment and safety
regarding safe installation. considerations. For further information, see the
instructions Load Sharing.
NOTICE
Depending on the supply voltage, voltages up to 1099 V WARNING
DC may occur on the terminals. Mains disconnect may not isolate the frequency
converter due to DC link connection.
F enclosure requirements
Connect the brake resistor to the brake terminals in each
4.1.11 Shielding against Electrical Noise
inverter module.
To ensure best EMC performance, mount the EMC metal
4.1.9 Brake Resistor Temperature Switch cover before mounting the mains power cable.

Torque: 0.5–0.6 Nm (5 in-lbs)


Screw size: M3
NOTICE
The EMC metal cover is only included in units with an
RFI filter.
This input can be used to monitor the temperature of an
externally connected brake resistor. If the input between
104 and 106 is established, the frequency converter trips
on warning/alarm 27, Brake IGBT. If the connection is closed
between 104 and 105, the frequency converter trips on
warning/alarm 27, Brake IGBT.
Install a Klixon switch that is normally closed. If this
function is not used, short-circuit 106 and 104 together.
Normally closed: 104–106 (factory-installed jumper)
Normally open: 104–105

Terminal number Function


106, 104, 105 Brake resistor temperature switch.

Table 4.7 Terminals for Brake Resister Temperature Switch

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 45


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

4.1.13 External Fan Supply

175ZT975.10
If the frequency converter is supplied by DC, or if the fan
must run independently of the power supply, apply an
external power supply. The connection is made on the
power card.

Terminal Function

4 4 number
100, 101 Auxiliary supply S, T
102, 103 Internal supply S, T

Table 4.10 External Fan Supply Terminals

The connector on the power card provides the connection


of mains voltage for the cooling fans. The fans are
connected from factory to be supplied from a common AC
line (jumpers between 100–102 and 101–103). If external
supply is needed, the jumpers are removed and the supply
Illustration 4.11 Mounting of EMC Shield is connected to terminals 100 and 101. Use a 5 A fuse for
protection. In UL applications, use a Littelfuse KLK-5 or
equivalent.
4.1.12 Mains Connection
4.1.14 Fuses
Connect mains to terminals 91, 92 and 93. Connect ground
to the terminal to the right of terminal 93. Use fuses and/or circuit breakers on the supply side as
protection in case of component break-down inside the
frequency converter (first fault).
Terminal Function
number
91, 92, 93 Mains R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 NOTICE
94 Ground Using fuses and/or circuit breakers is mandatory to
ensure compliance with IEC 60364 for CE or NEC 2009
Table 4.9 Mains Terminals Connection
for UL.

CAUTION WARNING
Check the nameplate to ensure that the mains voltage of
the frequency converter matches the power supply of Protect personnel and property against the consequence
the plant. of component break-down internally in the frequency
converter.

Ensure that the supply can supply the necessary current to


the frequency converter. Branch circuit protection
To protect the installation against electrical and fire hazard,
protect all branch circuits in an installation, switch gear,
If the unit is without built-in fuses, ensure that the
machines etc. against short circuit and overcurrent
appropriate fuses have the correct current rating.
according to national/international regulations.

NOTICE
The recommendations do not cover branch circuit
protection for UL.

Short-circuit protection
Danfoss recommends using the fuses/circuit breakers
mentioned in this section to protect service personnel and
property in case of component breakdown in the
frequency converter.

46 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

Overcurrent protection international regulations and that limit the energy into the
The frequency converter provides overload protection to frequency converter to an equal or lower level than the
limit threats to human life, property damage and to avoid compliant circuit breakers.
fire hazard due to overheating of the cables. The frequency If fuses/circuit breakers are selected according to
converter is equipped with an internal overcurrent recommendations, possible damage on the frequency
protection (4-18 Current Limit) that can be used for converter is mainly limited to damage inside the unit.
upstream overload protection (UL applications excluded).
Non-UL compliance
Moreover, fuses or circuit breakers can be used to provide
the overcurrent protection in the installation. Overcurrent If UL/cUL is not to be complied with, use the following
protection must always be carried out according to
national regulations.
fuses to ensure compliance with EN50178: 4 4
P110-P250 380–480 V type gG
The tables in this section list the recommended rated
current. Recommended fuses are of the type gG for small P315-P450 380–480 V type gR
to medium power sizes. For larger powers, aR fuses are
recommended. Use circuit breakers that meet the national/ Table 4.11 EN50178 Fuses

UL Compliance
380–480 V, Enclosure types E and F
The fuses below are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering 100,000 Arms (symmetrical), 240 V, or 480 V, or 500 V,
or 600 V depending on the frequency converter voltage rating. With the proper fusing, the frequency converter Short Circuit
Current Rating (SCCR) is 100,000 Arms.

Bussmann
Size/type Rating Ferraz Siba
PN*
P315 170M4017 700 A, 700 V 6.9URD31D08A0700 20 610 32.700
P355 170M6013 900 A, 700 V 6.9URD33D08A0900 20 630 32.900
P400 170M6013 900 A, 700 V 6.9URD33D08A0900 20 630 32.900
P450 170M6013 900 A, 700 V 6.9URD33D08A0900 20 630 32.900

Table 4.12 Enclosure Types E, Mains Fuses, 380–480 V

Internal Bussmann
Size/type Bussmann PN* Rating Siba
option
P500 170M7081 1600 A, 700 V 20 695 32.1600 170M7082
P560 170M7081 1600 A, 700 V 20 695 32.1600 170M7082
P630 170M7082 2000 A, 700 V 20 695 32.2000 170M7082
P710 170M7082 2000 A, 700 V 20 695 32.2000 170M7082
P800 170M7083 2500 A, 700 V 20 695 32.2500 170M7083
P1M0 170M7083 2500 A, 700 V 20 695 32.2500 170M7083

Table 4.13 Enclosure Types F, Mains Fuses, 380–480 V

Size/type Bussmann PN* Rating Siba


P500 170M8611 1100 A, 1000 V 20 781 32.1000
P560 170M8611 1100 A, 1000 V 20 781 32.1000
P630 170M6467 1400 A, 700 V 20 681 32.1400
P710 170M6467 1400 A, 700 V 20 681 32.1400
P800 170M8611 1100 A, 1000 V 20 781 32.1000
P1M0 170M6467 1400 A, 700 V 20 681 32.1400

Table 4.14 Enclosure Type F, Inverter Module DC Link Fuses,


380-480 V
*170M fuses from Bussmann shown use the -/80 visual indicator, -TN/80 Type T, -/110 or TN/110 Type T indicator fuses of the same size and
amperage may be substituted for external use.
**Any minimum 500 V UL listed fuse with associated current rating may be used to meet UL requirements.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 47


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

525–690 V, Enclosure types E and F

Size/type Bussmann PN* Rating Ferraz Siba


P450 170M4017 700 A, 700 V 6.9URD31D08A0700 20 610 32.700
P500 170M4017 700 A, 700 V 6.9URD31D08A0700 20 610 32.700
P560 170M6013 900 A, 700 V 6.9URD33D08A0900 20 630 32.900
P630 170M6013 900 A, 700 V 6.9URD33D08A0900 20 630 32.900

Table 4.15 Enclosure Type E, 525–690 V

4 4 Internal Bussmann
Size/type Bussmann PN* Rating Siba
option
P710 170M7081 1600 A, 700 V 20 695 32.1600 170M7082
P800 170M7081 1600 A, 700 V 20 695 32.1600 170M7082
P900 170M7081 1600 A, 700 V 20 695 32.1600 170M7082
P1M0 170M7081 1600 A, 700 V 20 695 32.1600 170M7082
P1M2 170M7082 2000 A, 700 V 20 695 32.2000 170M7082
P1M4 170M7083 2500 A, 700 V 20 695 32.2500 170M7083

Table 4.16 Enclosure Type Size F, Mains Fuses, 525–690 V

Size/type Bussmann PN* Rating Siba


P710 170M8611 1100 A, 1000 V 20 781 32. 1000
P800 170M8611 1100 A, 1000 V 20 781 32. 1000
P900 170M8611 1100 A, 1000 V 20 781 32. 1000
P1M0 170M8611 1100 A, 1000 V 20 781 32. 1000
P1M2 170M8611 1100 A, 1000 V 20 781 32. 1000
P1M4 170M8611 1100 A, 1000 V 20 781 32.1000

Table 4.17 Enclosure Type F, Inverter Module DC Link Fuses,


525–690 V
*170M fuses from Bussmann shown use the -/80 visual indicator, -TN/80 Type T, -/110 or TN/110 Type T indicator fuses of the same size and
amperage may be substituted for external use.

Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 rms symmetrical A, 500/600/690 V maximum when
protected by the above fuses.

Supplementary fuses

Enclosure size Bussmann PN* Rating


E and F KTK-4 4 A, 600 V

Table 4.18 SMPS Fuse

Size/type Bussmann PN* Littelfuse Rating


P315, 380–480 V KTK-4 4 A, 600 V
P450-P500, 525–690 V KTK-4 4 A, 600 V
P355-P1M0, 380–480 V KLK-15 15A, 600 V
P560-P1M4, 525–690 V KLK-15 15A, 600 V

Table 4.19 Fan Fuses

48 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

Bussmann
Size/type [A] Rating [V] Alternative fuses
PN*
P500-P1M0, 2.5–4.0 LPJ-6 SP 6 A, 600 Any listed Class J Dual Element, Time Delay, 6A
380–480 V or SPI
P710-P1M4, LPJ-10 SP 10 A, 600 Any listed Class J Dual Element, Time Delay, 10 A
525–690 V or SPI
P500-P1M0, 4.0–6.3 LPJ-10 SP 10 A, 600 Any listed Class J Dual Element, Time Delay, 10 A
380–480 V or SPI

4 4
P710-P1M4, LPJ-15 SP 15 A, 600 Any listed Class J Dual Element, Time Delay, 15 A
525–690 V or SPI
P500-P1M0, 6.3 - 10 LPJ-15 SP 15 A, 600 Any listed Class J Dual Element, Time Delay, 15 A
380–480 V or SPI
P710-P1M4, LPJ-20 SP 20 A, 600 Any listed Class J Dual Element, Time Delay, 20A
525–690 V or SPI
P500-P1M0, 10–16 LPJ-25 SP 25 A, 600 Any listed Class J Dual Element, Time Delay, 25 A
380–480 V or SPI
P710-P1M4, LPJ-20 SP 20 A, 600 Any listed Class J Dual Element, Time Delay, 20 A
525–690 V or SPI

Table 4.20 Manual Motor Controller Fuses

Enclosure size Bussmann PN* Rating Alternative fuses


F LPJ-30 SP or SPI 30 A, 600 V Any listed Class J Dual Element,
Time Delay, 30 A

Table 4.21 30 A Fuse-protected Terminal Fuse

Enclosure size Bussmann PN* Rating Alternative fuses


F LPJ-6 SP or SPI 6 A, 600 V Any listed Class J Dual Element,
Time Delay, 6 A

Table 4.22 Control Transformer Fuse

Enclosure size Bussmann PN* Rating


F GMC-800MA 800 mA, 250 V

Table 4.23 NAMUR Fuse

Enclosure size Bussmann PN* Rating Alternative fuses


F LP-CC-6 6 A, 600 V Any listed Class CC, 6 A

Table 4.24 Safety Relay Coil Fuse with PILZ Relay

Enclosure size Power and voltage Type


E1/E2 P315 380-480 V & P450-P630 525-690 V ABB OT600U03
E1/E2 P355-P450 380-480 V ABB OT800U03
F3 P500 380-480 V & P710-P800 525-690 V Merlin Gerin NPJF36000S12AAYP
F3 P560-P710 380-480 V & P900 525-690 V Merlin Gerin NRK36000S20AAYP
F4 P800-P1M0 380-480 V & P1M0-P1M4 525-690 V Merlin Gerin NRK36000S20AAYP

Table 4.25 Mains Disconnectors Enclosure Sizes E and F

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 49


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

Enclosure size Power and voltage Type


F3 P500 380–480 V & P710-P800 525–690 V Merlin Gerin NPJF36120U31AABSCYP
F3 P560-P710 380–480 V & P900 525–690 V Merlin Gerin NRJF36200U31AABSCYP
F4 P800 380–480 V & P1M0-P1M4 525–690 V Merlin Gerin NRJF36200U31AABSCYP
F4 P1M0 380–480 V Merlin Gerin NRJF36250U31AABSCYP

Table 4.26 Circuit Breakers Enclosure Size F

Enclosure size Power and voltage Type


4 4 F3 P500-P560 380–480 V & P710-P900 525–690 V Eaton XTCE650N22A
F3 P 630-P710 380–480 V Eaton XTCEC14P22B
F4 P800-P1M0 380–480 V & P1M0-P1M4 525–690 V Eaton XTCEC14P22B

Table 4.27 Mains Contactors Enclosure Size F

4.1.15 Motor Insulation - Reinforce the PE so the high frequency


impedance is lower in the PE than the
For motor cable lengths ≤ the maximum cable length input power leads.
listed in chapter 7 General Specifications, the recommended - Provide a good high-frequency
motor insulation ratings are in Table 4.28. The peak voltage connection between the motor and the
can be up to twice the DC link voltage, 2.8 times the frequency converter by screened cable.
mains voltage, due to transmission line effects in the The cable must have a 360° connection
motor cable. If a motor has a lower insulation rating, use a in the motor and frequency converter.
dU/dt or sine wave filter.
- Ensure that the impedance from
frequency converter to building ground
Nominal mains voltage Motor insulation
is lower than the grounding impedance
UN ≤ 420 V Standard ULL = 1300 V of the machine. Make a direct ground
420 V < UN ≤ 500 V Reinforced ULL = 1600 V connection between the motor and load
500 V < UN ≤ 600 V Reinforced ULL = 1800 V motor.
600 V < UN ≤ 690 V Reinforced ULL = 2000 V
• Apply conductive lubrication.
Table 4.28 Motor Insulation at Various Nominal Mains Voltages • Try to ensure that the mains voltage is balanced
to ground. Balancing to ground can be difficult
4.1.16 Motor Bearing Currents for IT, TT, TN-CS or grounded leg systems.

• Use an insulated bearing as recommended by the


For motors with a rating of 110 kW or greater that operate motor manufacturer.
via frequency converters, use NDE (Non-Drive End)
insulated bearings to eliminate circulating bearing currents
NOTICE
due to the physical size of the motor. To minimise DE Motors from reputable manufacturers typically have
(Drive End) bearing and shaft currents, proper grounding insulated bearings fitted as standard in motors of this
of the frequency converter, motor, driven machine, and size.
motor to the driven machine is required. Although failure If none of these strategies work, consult the factory.
due to bearing currents is rare, if it occurs, use the If necessary, after consulting Danfoss:
following mitigation strategies. • Lower the IGBT switching frequency.
• Modify the inverter waveform, 60 °AVM vs.
Standard mitigation strategies: SFAVM.
• Use an insulated bearing. • Install a shaft grounding system or use an
• Apply rigorous installation procedures: isolating coupling between motor and load.
- Ensure that the motor and load motor • Use minimum speed settings if possible.
are aligned.
• Use a dU/dt or sinus filter.
- Strictly follow common EMC installation
guidelines.

50 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

4.1.17 Control Cable Routing

130BB187.10
Tie down all control wires to the designated control cable
routing as shown in Illustration 4.21. To ensure optimum
electrical immunity, connect the screens properly.

1
Fieldbus connection
Connections are made to the relevant options on the
control card. For details, see the relevant fieldbus
instruction. Place the cable in the provided path inside the 4 4
frequency converter and tie it down with other control
wires (see Illustration 4.12 and Illustration 4.13).
176FA246.10

Illustration 4.13 Control Card Wiring Path for F1/F3. Control


Card Wiring for the F2/F4 Use the Same Path

In the Chassis (IP00) and NEMA 1 units, it is also possible


to connect the fieldbus from the top of the unit as shown
in Illustration 4.14 to Illustration 4.16. On the NEMA 1 unit a
cover plate must be removed.
Kit number for fieldbus top connection: 176F1742.

T/L3 93

130BA867.10
S/L2 92
R/L1 91

+DC 89
W/13
-DC 88
V/T2 97
U/T1 96

Illustration 4.12 Control Card Wiring Path for E1 and E2

ption A
Profibus O ce
FC300 Servi

Illustration 4.14 Top Connection for Fieldbus.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 51


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

4.1.18 Access to Control Terminals

130BB255.10
All terminals to the control cables are located beneath the
LCP. They are accessed by opening the door of the IP21/
IP54 unit, or by removing the covers of the IP00 unit.

4.1.19 Electrical Installation, Control


Terminals
4 4 To connect the cable to the terminal:
1. Strip off 9-10 mm of the insulation.

130BA150.10
Illustration 4.15 Fieldbus Top Entry Kit, Installed

130BB256.10

9 - 10 mm

(0.37 in)

Illustration 4.17 Strip off Insulation

2. Insert a screwdriver1) in the square hole.


3. Insert the cable in the adjacent circular hole.

130BT312.10
Illustration 4.16 Screen Termination/Strain Relief for Fieldbus
Conductors

Installation of 24 V DC external supply


Torque: 0.5 - 0.6 Nm (5 in-lbs)
Screw size: M3

Terminal number Function


35 (-), 36 (+) 24 V DC external supply
Illustration 4.18 Inserting Cable

Table 4.29 Terminals for 24 V DC External Supply

24 V DC external supply can be used as low-voltage supply 4. Remove the screwdriver. The cable is now
to the control card and any option cards installed. This mounted in the terminal.
enables full operation of the LCP (including parameter 1) Maximum 0.4 x 2.5 mm
setting) without connection to mains. Note that a warning
of low voltage is given when 24 V DC has been connected;
To remove the cable from the terminal:
however, there is no tripping.
1. Insert a screwdriver1) in the square hole.
2. Pull out the cable.
WARNING 1) Max. 0.4 x 2.5 mm
To ensure correct galvanic isolation (type PELV) on the
control terminals of the frequency converter, use 24 V
DC supply of type PELV.

52 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

130BT311.10

130BT306.10
4 4
Illustration 4.20 Unplugging Control Terminals
Illustration 4.19 Removing Cable

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 53


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

4.1.20 Electrical Installation, Control Cables


CONTROL CARD CONNCECTION

130BB759.10
Switch Mode
Power Supply
10Vdc 24Vdc
15mA 130/200mA
+10 Vdc 50 (+10 V OUT)

4 4
S202
-10 Vdc

1 2

ON
+10 Vdc 53 (A IN)
ON/I=0-20mA
0/4-20 mA 1 2
S201 OFF/U=0-10V
-10 Vdc
54 (A IN ) ON
+10 Vdc
0/4-20 mA
55 (COM A IN )

12 (+24V OUT )
P 5-00
13 (+24V OUT )

24V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 0V (PNP)

24V (NPN) (COM A OUT) 39 Analog Output


19 (D IN ) 0V (PNP) 0/4-20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
24V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT ) 0V (PNP) S801
ON=Terminated
1 2

ON
24 V OFF=Open
OV
5V

24V (NPN)
29 (D IN/OUT )
24 V 0V (PNP)
S801

OV
RS - 485 (N RS-485) 69 RS-485
Interface
24V (NPN)
32 (D IN ) 0V (PNP) (P RS-485) 68

24V (NPN) (COM RS-485) 61


33 (D IN )
0V (PNP)
(PNP) = Source
(NPN) = Sink
37 (D IN )

5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
CI45 CI45 CI45 CI45 CI45
MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE

11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 15 16 17 18 15 16 17 18 15 16 17 18 15 16 17 18

Illustration 4.21 Electrical Terminals Diagram

A=Analog, D=Digital
*Terminal 37 (optional) is used for STO. For STO installation instructions, refer to the Safe Torque Off Operating Instructions for
Danfoss VLT® Frequency Converters.
**Do not connect cable screen.

54 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

130BB760.11
CUSTOMER 118 117
1
SUPPLIED 24V RET. + - 1
1 CONTROL CARD PIN 20
REGEN
(TERMINAL JUMPERED TOGETHER)
TERMINALS 2
1
CUSTOMER 2 3
SUPPLIED 24V
3
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED 4
3 (TERMINAL JUMPERED TOGETHER)
5
3
5

4 4
10 MCB 113 PIN X46/1

11 MCB 113 PIN X46/3 TB8 4


12 MCB 113 PIN X46/5 3
C14
13 MCB 113 PIN X46/7
W 98 98 W
14 MCB 113 PIN X46/9 C13
PILZ
15 MCB 113 PIN X46/11 TERMINALS V 97 97 V
A2
16 MCB 113 PIN X46/13 U 96 96 U
FUSE
17 MCB 113 PIN 12
TB4 R- 81 EXTERNAL BRAKE 81 R-
18 CONTROL CARD PIN 37
2
R+ 82 EXTERNAL BRAKE 82 R+
30 TB08 PIN 01
W 98
31 TB08 PIN 02
V 97
32 TB08 PIN 04

33 TB08 PIN 05 U 96
NAMUR Terminal Definition

34 MCB 113 PIN X47/1 TB3 INVERTER 1

35 MCB 113 PIN X47/3


R- 81 EXTERNAL BRAKE
36 MCB 113 PIN X47/2
R+ 82 EXTERNAL BRAKE
37 MCB 113 PIN X47/4 1
38 MCB 113 PIN X47/6 TB3 INVERTER 1

39 MCB 113 PIN X47/5 W 98

40 MCB 113 PIN X47/7 V 97

41 MCB 113 PIN X47/9 96


U
42 MCB 113 PIN X47/8 TB3 INVERTER 2
50 CONTROL CARD PIN 53
R- 81 EXTERNAL BRAKE
51 CONTROL CARD PIN 55
2
60 MCB 113 PIN X45/1 R+ 82 EXTERNAL BRAKE

61 MCB 113 PIN X45/2


TB3 INVERTER 2
62 MCB 113 PIN X45/3

63 MCB 113 PIN X45/4 AUX FAN AUX FAN


90 MCB 112 PIN 1

91 MCB 112 PIN 2 L1 L2 L1 L2


100 101 102 103
TB7

Illustration 4.22 Diagram showing all Electrical Terminals with NAMUR Option

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 55


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

Long control cables and analog signals may, in rare cases, NOTICE
and depending on installation, result in 50/60 Hz ground
Control cables must be screened/armoured.
loops due to noise from mains supply cables.

130BT340.10
If ground loops occur, it may be necessary to break the
screen or insert a 100 nF capacitor between screen and
enclosure.

4 4 Connect the digital and analog inputs and outputs


separately to the frequency converter common inputs
(terminal 20, 55, 39) to avoid ground currents from both
groups to affect other groups. For example, switching on
the digital input may disturb the analog input signal.

Input polarity of control terminals


PNP (Source)
130BT106.10
+24 VDC

Digital input wiring


0 VDC

12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

Illustration 4.25 Screened Control Cable

Connect the wires as described. To ensure optimum


Illustration 4.23 PNP Polarity electrical immunity, connect the screens properly.

4.1.21 Switches S201, S202 and S801


+24 VDC

130BT107.11
0 VDC

NPN (Sink) Use switches S201 (A53) and S202 (A54) to configure the
Digital input wiring
analog input terminals 53 and 54 as a current (0–20 mA)
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37 or a voltage (-10 V to +10 V).

Enable termination on the RS-485 port (terminals 68 and


69) via the switch S801 (BUS TER.).

See Illustration 4.21.

Default setting:
S201 (A53) = OFF (voltage input)
S202 (A54) = OFF (voltage input)
S801 (Bus termination) = OFF

Illustration 4.24 NPN Polarity

56 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

NOTICE 4.2 Connection Examples


When changing the function of S201, S202, or S801, do
not to use force during the switch over. Remove the LCP
4.2.1 Start/Stop
fixture (cradle) when operating the switches. Do not
Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Start
operate the switches when the frequency converter is
Terminal 27 = 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] No
powered.
operation (Default coast inverse)
Terminal 37 = STO

4 4

130BT310.11

130BA155.12
P 5-10 [8]

P 5-12 [0]
+24V
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

Start/Stop Safe Stop

Speed

Start/Stop
[18]
Illustration 4.27 Wiring Start/Stop

Illustration 4.26 Switch Location

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 57


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

4.2.2 Pulse Start/Stop

130BA021.12
12 +24V
Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9] Latched
start
Terminal 27= 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [6] Stop inverse 18 Par. 5-10
Terminal 37 = STO

27 Par. 5-12

130BA156.12
P 5 - 12 [6]
P 5 - 10[9]

4 4
+24V

29 Par. 5-13
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

32 Par. 5-14

37

Start Stop inverse Safe Stop Illustration 4.29 Speed Up/Down

Speed 4.2.4 Potentiometer Reference

Voltage reference via a potentiometer


Reference Source 1 = [1] Analog input 53 (default)
Terminal 53, Low Voltage = 0 V
Terminal 53, High Voltage = 10 V
Start (18) Terminal 53, Low Ref./Feedback = 0 RPM
Terminal 53, High Ref./Feedback = 1500 RPM
Start (27)
Switch S201 = OFF (U)
Illustration 4.28 Wiring Pulse Start/Stop
+10V/30mA

4.2.3 Speed Up/Down 130BA154.11


Speed RPM
P 6-15 39 42 50 53 54 55

Terminals 29/32 = Speed up/down


Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9]
Start (default)
Terminal 27 = 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [19] Ref. voltage
P 6-11 10V
Freeze reference
Terminal 29 = 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input [21]
Speed up 1 kΩ

Terminal 32 = 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input [22]


Speed down Illustration 4.30 Potentiometer Reference

NOTICE
Terminal 29 only in FC x02 (x = series type).

58 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

4.3 Final Set-up and Test 1. Connect terminal 37 to terminal 12 (if terminal 37
is available).
To test the set-up and to ensure that the frequency
2. Connect terminal 27 to terminal 12 or set
converter is running, follow these steps.
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input to [0] No function.

Step 1. Locate the motor nameplate. 3. Activate the AMA 1-29 Automatic Motor
Adaptation (AMA).
NOTICE
4. Select between complete or reduced AMA. If a
The motor is either star (Y) or delta connected (Δ). This
sine wave filter is mounted, run only the reduced
information is on the motor nameplate.
AMA, or remove the sine-wave filter during the 4 4
AMA procedure.

130BA767.10
5. Press [OK]. The display shows Press [Hand On] to
start.
6. Press [Hand On]. A progress bar indicates if the
AMA is in progress.
Stop the AMA during operation
1. Press [Off]. The frequency converter enters into
alarm mode and the display shows that the user
terminated the AMA.
Successful AMA
1. The display shows Press [OK] to finish AMA.
2. Press [OK] to exit the AMA state.
Unsuccessful AMA
1. The frequency converter enters into alarm mode.
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR
A description of the alarm can be found in .
MOD MCV 315E Nr. 135189 12 04 IL/IN 6.5
kW 400 PRIMARY SF 1.15 2. Report Value in the [Alarm Log] shows the last
HP 536 V 690 A 410.6 CONN Y COS f 0.85 40
measuring sequence carried out by the AMA,
mm 1481 V A CONN AMB 40 °C
Hz 50 V A CONN ALT 1000 m
before the frequency converter entered alarm
DESIGNN SECONDARY RISE 80 °C mode. This number along with the description of
DUTY S1 V A CONN ENCLOSURE IP23 the alarm helps with troubleshooting. State the
INSUL I EFFICIENCY % 95.8% 100% 95.8% 75% WEIGHT 1.83 ton
alarm number and description when contacting
Danfoss service.
CAUTION
NOTICE
Illustration 4.31 Nameplate
Incorrectly registered motor nameplate data, or a too big
difference between the motor power size and the
frequency converter power size often causes
Step 2. Enter the motor nameplate data in this
unsuccessful AMA.
parameter list.
To access this list, press [Quick Menu] then select Q2 Quick
Setup. Step 4. Set the speed limit and ramp time.

1. 1-20 Motor Power [kW] • 3-02 Minimum Reference


1-21 Motor Power [HP] • 3-03 Maximum Reference
2. 1-22 Motor Voltage Step 5. Set up the desired limits for speed and ramp
3. 1-23 Motor Frequency time.

4. 1-24 Motor Current • 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or 4-12 Motor
Speed Low Limit [Hz]
5. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
• 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or 4-14 Motor
Step 3. Activate the Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA). Speed High Limit [Hz]
Performing an AMA ensures optimum performance. The
• 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
AMA measures the values from the motor model
equivalent diagram. • 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 59


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

4.4 Additional Connections

130BA170.10
4.4.1 Mechanical Brake Control

In hoisting/lowering applications, it is necessary to be


able to control an electro-mechanical brake:
• Control the brake using any relay output or
digital output (terminal 27 or 29).

4 4 • Keep the output closed (voltage-free) as long as


the frequency converter is unable to support the
motor, for example due to the load being too
heavy.

• Select [32] Mechanical brake control in parameter


group 5-4* Relays for applications with an electro-
mechanical brake.

• The brake is released when the motor current


exceeds the preset value in 2-20 Release Brake
Current.

• The brake is engaged when the output frequency


is less than the frequency set in 2-21 Activate
LC filter
Brake Speed [RPM] or 2-22 Activate Brake Speed
[Hz], and only if the frequency converter carries
out a stop command.
If the frequency converter is in alarm mode or in an over-
voltage situation, the mechanical brake immediately cuts
in.

4.4.2 Parallel Connection of Motors

The frequency converter can control several parallel-


connected motors. The total current consumption of the
motors must not exceed the rated output current IM,N for
the frequency converter.

NOTICE
Installations with cables connected in a common joint as
in Illustration 4.32 are only recommended for short cable
lengths.

NOTICE
When motors are connected in parallel, 1-29 Automatic
Motor Adaptation (AMA) cannot be used.

NOTICE Illustration 4.32 Parallel Motor Connection


The electronic thermal relay (ETR) of the frequency
converter cannot be used as motor overload protection
for the individual motor in systems with parallel- Problems may arise at start-up and at low RPM values if
connected motors. Provide further motor overload motor sizes are widely different because small motors'
protection, for example thermistors in each motor or relatively high ohmic resistance in the stator calls for a
individual thermal relays (circuit breakers are not higher voltage at start-up and at low RPM values.
suitable as protection).

60 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Electrical Installation Operating Instructions

4.4.3 Motor Thermal Protection

The electronic thermal relay in the frequency converter has


received UL approval for single motor overload protection,
when 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to [4] ETR Trip
and 1-24 Motor Current is set to the rated motor current
(see motor nameplate).
For thermal motor protection, it is also possible to use the
VLT PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 option. This card
provides ATEX certificate to protect motors in explosion 4 4
hazardous areas, Zone 1/21 and Zone 2/22. When
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR and is
combined with the use of MCB 112, it is possible to
control an Ex-e motor in explosion hazardous areas.
Consult the relevant programming guide for details on how
to set up the frequency converter for safe operation of Ex-
e motors.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 61


How to Operate the Frequenc... Operating Instructions

5 How to Operate the Frequency Converter

5.1 Operating with LCP

130BA018.13
5.1.1 Three Ways of Operating

The frequency converter can be operated in 3 ways: Status 1(0) a

• Graphical local control panel (GLCP). 1234rpm 10,4A 43,5Hz

• Numeric local control panel (NLCP).

5 5 • RS-485 serial communication or USB, both for PC 1


43,5Hz
b

connection.
If the frequency converter is fitted with fieldbus option,
refer to the relevant documentation. Run OK c

5.1.2 How to Operate Graphical LCP (GLCP) Quick Main Alarm


2 Status
Menu Menu Log
The following instructions are valid for the GLCP (LCP 102).

The GLCP is divided into 4 functional groups:

Ca
ck

n
Ba

ce
l
1. Graphical display with status lines.
2. Menu keys and indicator lights (LEDs) - selecting

Info
mode, changing parameters and switching 3 On OK

between display functions.


Warn.
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
4. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs). Alarm

Graphical display
The LCD display is backlit with a total of 6 alpha-numeric Hand Auto
4 Off Reset
on on
lines. All data is displayed on the LCP, which can show up
to 5 operating variables while in [Status] mode.
Display lines: Illustration 5.1 LCP

a. Status line
Status messages displaying icons and graphics.
The display is divided into 3 sections:
b. Line 1–2 Top section
Operator data lines displaying data and variables (a) shows the status when in status mode, or up to 2
defined or selected by the user. Press [Status] to variables when not in status mode, and in the case of
add one extra line. Alarm/Warning.
c. Status line The number of the active set-up (selected as the active
Status messages displaying text. set-up in 0-10 Active Set-up) is shown. When programming
in another set-up than the active set-up, the number of
the set-up being programmed appears to the right in
brackets.
Middle section
(b) shows up to 5 variables with related unit, regardless of
status. In case of alarm/warning, the warning is shown
instead of the variables.

62 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Operate the Frequenc... Operating Instructions

Bottom section

130BP062.10
Status 1 (1)
(c) always shows the state of the frequency converter in 207RPM 5.25A 24.4 kW
status mode. 1.1

Press [Status] to toggle between 3 status readout displays. 6.9 Hz


1.3
Operating variables with different formatting are shown in
each status screen. See the examples below. 1.2
Auto Remote Running
Several values or measurements can be linked to each of
the displayed operating variables. The values/ 2
measurements to be displayed can be defined via
Illustration 5.3 Example of Status Display II
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small,
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, 0-23 Display Line 2 Large and
0-24 Display Line 3 Large, which can be accessed via [Quick
Menu], Q3 Function Set-ups, Q3-1 General Settings, Q3-13 Status display III 5 5
Display Settings. This state displays the event and action of the smart logic
control.
Each value/measurement readout parameter selected in

130BP063.10
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small to 0-24 Display Line 3 Large has Status 1 (1)
its own scale and number of digits after a possible decimal 778 RPM 0.86 A 4.0 kW
point. Larger numeric values are displayed with few digits
State: 0 off 0 (off )
after the decimal point.
When: -
Ex.: Current readout Do: -
5.25 A; 15.2 A 105 A.
Auto Remote Running
Status display I
Illustration 5.4 Example of Status Display III
This readout state is standard after start-up or initialisation.
Press [INFO] to obtain information about the value/
measurement linked to the displayed operating variables
(1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2, and 3). Display contrast adjustment
See the operating variables shown in the display in Press [status] and [▲] for darker display.
Illustration 5.2. 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2 Press [status] and [▼] for brighter display.
and 3 are shown in medium size.

130BP074.10
Status ! 1(1)
Top section
130BP041.10

Status 1 (1) 43 RPM 5.44 A 25.3kW


799 RPM 7.83 A 36.4 kw
1.1 1.4 Hz
0.000 Middle section
2.9%
1.2
53.2 % ! Pwr.card temp (W29)
Auto Remote Ramping Bottom section
2 Auto Remote Running

Illustration 5.5 Display Sections


3 1.3

Illustration 5.2 Example of Status Display I


Indicator lights (LEDs)
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or
Status display II warning LED lights up. A status and alarm text appear in
See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 2) shown in the display.
the display in Illustration 5.3. The On LED is activated when the frequency converter
In the example, speed, motor current, motor power and receives power from mains voltage, a DC bus terminal, or a
frequency are selected as variables in the first and second 24 V external supply. At the same time, the backlight is on.
lines. • Green LED/On: Control section is working.
1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2 is shown in large
size. • Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning.

• Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 63


How to Operate the Frequenc... Operating Instructions

• Most VAV and CAV supply and return fans.

130BP044.10
• Cooling tower fans.

On • Primary, secondary and condenser water pumps.

• Other pump, fan and compressor applications.


Among other features, it also includes parameters for
Warn. selecting which variables to display in the LCP, digital
preset speeds, scaling of analog references, closed loop
single-zone and multi-zone applications, and specific

Alarm functions related to fans, pumps and compressors.

Illustration 5.6 Indicator Lights


5 5 The Quick Menu parameters can be accessed immediately
unless a password has been created via 0-60 Main Menu
Password, 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password,
GLCP keys
0-65 Personal Menu Password or 0-66 Access to Personal
Menu keys
Menu w/o Password.
The menu keys are divided into functions. The keys below
It is possible to switch directly between Quick Menu mode
the display and indicator lights are used for parameter set-
and Main Menu mode.
up, including selection of display indication during normal
operation.
[Main Menu]
130BP045.10

[Main Menu] is used for programming all parameters. The


Quick Main Alarm
Status
Menu Menu Log main menu parameters can be accessed immediately
unless a password has been created via 0-60 Main Menu
Illustration 5.7 Menu Keys Password, 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password,
0-65 Personal Menu Password, or 0-66 Access to Personal
Menu w/o Password. For most HVAC applications, it is not
[Status] necessary to access the main menu parameters. Instead,
[Status] indicates the status of the frequency converter the Quick Menu, Quick Set-up and Function Set-up provide
and/or the motor. 3 different readouts can be selected by the simplest and quickest access to the most required
pressing the [Status] key: parameters.
It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode
• 5-line readouts and Quick Menu mode.
• 4-line readouts Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing [Main
Menu] for 3 s. The parameter shortcut allows direct access
• smart logic control
to any parameter.
Press [Status] to select the display mode or for changing
[Alarm Log]
back to Display mode from either Quick Menu mode, Main
[Alarm Log] displays an alarm list of the 10 most recent
Menu mode or Alarm mode. Also press [Status] to toggle
alarms (numbered A1-A10). To obtain more details about
single or double readout mode.
an alarm, press the navigation keys to manoeuvre to the
[Quick Menu] alarm number and press [OK]. Information is displayed
[Quick Menu] allows quick set-up of the frequency about the condition of the frequency converter before it
converter. The most common HVAC functions can be enters the alarm mode.
programmed here.
The [Alarm Log] key on the LCP allows access to both
The Quick Menu consists of alarm log and maintenance log.
• My personal menu [Back]
• Quick set-up [Back] reverts to the previous step or layer in the
navigation structure.
• Function set-up

• Changes made
Back
• Loggings
The Function Set-up provides quick and easy access to all Illustration 5.8 Back Key
parameters required for most HVAC applications including:

64 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Operate the Frequenc... Operating Instructions

[Cancel] [Hand On]


[Cancel] cancels the last change or command as long as [Hand On] enables control of the frequency converter via
the display has not been changed. the GLCP. [Hand On] also starts the motor and allows
entering the motor speed data with the navigation keys.
The key can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
Cancel
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
Illustration 5.9 Cancel Key The following control signals are still active when [Hand
On] is activated:

• [Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto On].


[Info] • Reset.
[Info] displays information about a command, parameter,
• Coasting stop inverse.
or function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed
information when needed. • Reversing. 5 5
Exit Info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel].
• Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb.
• Stop command from serial communication.
Info
• Quick stop.
Illustration 5.10 Info Key
• DC brake.
NOTICE
Navigation Keys External stop signals activated with control signals or a
The 4 navigation keys are used to navigate between the fieldbus override a start command via the LCP.
different options available in the Quick Menu, Main Menu
and Alarm Log. Press the keys to move the cursor. [Off]
[Off] stops the connected motor. The key can be selected
[OK]
as [1] Enabled or [0] Disabled via 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP. If no
[OK] is used for selecting a parameter marked by the
external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
cursor and for enabling the change of a parameter.
inactive, the motor can only be stopped by disconnecting
the mains supply.
130BT117.10

[Auto On]
Ca

[Auto On] enables the frequency converter to be


ck

nc
Ba

el

controlled via the control terminals and/or serial communi-


cation. When a start signal is applied on the control
terminals and/or the bus, the frequency converter starts.
The key can be selected as [1] Enabled or [0] Disabled via
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.
Info

On OK
NOTICE
Warn An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On] –
[Auto On].
Alarm

Illustration 5.11 Navigation Keys [Reset]


[Reset] is used for resetting the frequency converter after
an alarm (trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0]
Operation keys Disable via 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
Operation keys for local control are found at the bottom of The parameter shortcut can be carried out by holding
the control panel. down the [Main Menu] key for 3 s. The parameter shortcut
allows direct access to any parameter.
130BP046.10

Hand Auto
Off Reset
on on

Illustration 5.12 Operation Keys

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 65


How to Operate the Frequenc... Operating Instructions

5.2 Operating via Serial Communication

130BT308.10
5.2.1 RS-485 Bus Connection

One or more frequency converters can be connected to a


controller (or master) using the RS-485 standard interface.
Terminal 68 is connected to the P signal (TX+, RX+), while
terminal 69 is connected to the N signal (TX-, RX-).

If more than one frequency converter is connected to a


master, use parallel connections.

5 5
130BA060.11
Illustration 5.14 USB Connection to Frequency Converter

RS 232
5.3.2 PC Software Tools
+ 68 69 68 69 68 69
USB
- PC-based MCT 10 Set-up Software
RS 485
All frequency converters are equipped with a serial
communication port. Danfoss provides a PC tool for
Illustration 5.13 Connection Example communication between PC and frequency converter.
Check the section in chapter 1.2.1 Additional Resources for
detailed information on this tool.
To avoid potential equalising currents in the screen,
ground the cable screen via terminal 61, which is MCT 10 Set-up Software
connected to the frame via an RC link. MCT 10 Set-up Software has been designed as an easy-to-
use interactive tool for setting parameters in our frequency
Bus termination converters.
Terminate the RS-485 bus by a resistor network at both The MCT 10 Set-up Software is useful for:
ends. If the frequency converter is the first or the last
device in the RS-485 loop, set the switch S801 on the
• Planning a communication network off-line. MCT
10 Set-up Software contains a complete
control card to ON. frequency converter database.
For more information, see the paragraph Switches S201,
S202, and S801. • Commissioning frequency converters online.

5.3 Operating via PC • Saving settings for all frequency converters.

• Replacing a frequency converter in a network.


5.3.1 How to Connect a PC to the
Frequency Converter • Simple and accurate documentation of frequency
converter settings after commissioning.

To control or program the frequency converter from a PC, • Expanding an existing network.
install the PC-based configuration tool MCT 10 Set-up • Supporting future-developed frequency
Software. converters.
The PC is connected via a standard (host/device) USB
MCT 10 Set-up Software supports PROFIBUS DP-V1 via a
cable, or via the RS-485 interface as shown in
master class 2 connection. It enables online reading/
chapter 5.2.1 RS-485 Bus Connection.
writing of parameters in a frequency converter via the
PROFIBUS network. This network eliminates the need for
NOTICE an extra communication network.
The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the
supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
The USB connection is connected to protective earth.
Use only an isolated laptop as PC connection to the USB
connector on the frequency converter.

66 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Operate the Frequenc... Operating Instructions

Save frequency converter settings: 5.3.3 Tips and Tricks


1. Connect a PC to the unit via USB com port.
(NOTE: Use a PC, which is isolated from the mains • For most HVAC applications, the Quick Menu,
with the USB port. Failure to do so may damage Quick Set-up and Function Set-up provide the
the equipment. simplest and quickest access to the most required
parameters.
2. Open MCT 10 Set-up Software.
3. Select Read from drive.
• Whenever possible, performing an AMA ensures
the best shaft performance.
4. Select Save as.
• Adjust display contrast by pressing [Status] and
All parameters are now stored in the PC. [▲] for darker display, or by pressing [Status] and
Load frequency converter settings: [▼] for brighter display.

1. Connect a PC to the frequency converter via USB • Under Quick Menu and Changes Made, all 5 5
com port. parameters which have been changed from
factory settings are displayed.
2. Open MCT 10 Set-up Software.
3. Select Open – stored files are shown.
• Press and hold [Main Menu] key for 3 s to access
to any parameter.
4. Open the appropriate file.
• For service purposes, copy all parameters to the
5. Select Write to drive. LCP. See 0-50 LCP Copy for further information.
All parameter settings are now transferred to the
frequency converter. 5.3.4 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings
A separate manual for MCT 10 Set-up Software is available
when Using GLCP
at www.Danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions/Software-
download/DDPC+Software+Program.htm. Once the set-up of a frequency converter is complete,
store (back up) the parameter settings in the GLCP or on a
The MCT 10 Set-up Software modules PC via MCT 10 Set-up Software.
The following modules are included in the software
package.

MCT Set-up 10 Software


WARNING
Stop the motor before performing any of these
Setting parameters.
operations.
Copy to and from frequency converters.
Documentation and print of parameter settings,
Data storage in the LCP:
including diagrams.
1. Go to 0-50 LCP Copy.
Ext. user interface
Preventive Maintenance Schedule. 2. Press [OK].
Clock settings. 3. Select [1] All to LCP.
Timed Action Programming.
Smart Logic Controller Set-up.
4. Press [OK].
All parameter settings are now stored in the GLCP
Table 5.1 The MCT 10 Set-up Software Modules indicated by the progress bar. When 100% is reached,
press [OK].
Ordering number
Order the CD containing MCT 10 Set-up Software using
The GLCP can now be connected to another frequency
code number 130B1000.
converter and the parameter settings copied to this
The software can be downloaded from the Danfoss frequency converter.
internet site at www.Danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSo-
lutions/Softwaredownload/DDPC+Software+Program.htm Data transfer from the LCP to the frequency converter
1. Go to 0-50 LCP Copy.
2. Press [OK].
3. Select [2] All from LCP.
4. Press [OK].
The parameter settings stored in the GLCP are now
transferred to the frequency converter indicated by the
progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 67


How to Operate the Frequenc... Operating Instructions

5.3.5 Initialisation to Default Settings Manual initialisation


NOTICE
There are 2 ways to initialise the frequency converter to When carrying out manual initialisation, serial communi-
default: cation, RFI filter settings and fault log settings are reset.
Manual initialisation removes parameters selected in
• Recommended initialisation 0-25 My Personal Menu.
• Manual initialisation
1. Disconnect from mains and wait until the display
Be aware that they have different impact according to the
turns off.
following description.
2. Press
Recommended initialisation (via 14-22 Operation Mode)
5 5
2a [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at the
1. Select 14-22 Operation Mode. same time while powering up for the
2. Press [OK]. LCP 102, graphical LCP.

3. Select [2] Initialisation (for NLCP select “2”). 2b [Menu] while powering up for LCP 101,
numerical LCP.
4. Press [OK].
3. Release the keys after 5 s.
5. Remove power to unit and wait for the display to
turn off. 4. The frequency converter is now programmed
according to default settings.
6. Reconnect power and the frequency converter is
reset. Note that first start-up takes a few more This parameter initialises all except:
seconds than normal. 15-00 Operating hours
15-03 Power Up's
7. Press [Reset]. 15-04 Over Temp's
14-22 Operation Mode initialises all except: 15-05 Over Volt's

• 14-50 RFI Filter.

• 8-30 Protocol.

• 8-31 Address.

• 8-32 Baud Rate.

• 8-35 Minimum Response Delay.

• 8-36 Max Response Delay.

• 8-37 Maximum Inter-Char Delay.

• 15-00 Operating hours to 15-05 Over Volt's.

• 15-20 Historic Log: Event to 15-22 Historic Log:


Time.

• 15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code to 15-32 Alarm Log:


Time.

NOTICE
Parameters selected in 0-25 My Personal Menu stay
present with default factory setting.

68 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

6 How to Programme

6.1 Basic Programming


6.1.1 Parameter Set-Up

Group Title Function


0-** Operation and Display Parameters used to programme the fundamental functions of the frequency converter and the
LCP including:
• Selection of language.
• Selection of which variables are displayed at each position in the display. As an example,
static duct pressure or condenser water return temperature can be displayed with the
setpoint in small digits in the top row and feedback in large digits in the centre of the
display). 6 6
• Enabling/disabling of the LCP keys.

• Passwords for the LCP.

• Upload and download of commissioned parameters to/from the LCP.

• Setting the built-in clock.

1-** Load/Motor Parameters used to configure the frequency converter for the specific application and motor
including:
• Open or closed loop operation.
• Type of application such as:

- Compressor

- Fan

- Centrifugal pump

• Motor nameplate data.

• Auto-tuning of the frequency converter to the motor for optimum performance.

• Flying start (typically used in fan applications).

• Thermal motor protection.

2-** Brakes Parameters used to configure brake functions of the frequency converter, which, although not
common in many HVAC applications, can be useful in special fan applications. Parameters
include:
• DC brake.
• Dynamic/resistor brake.

• Overvoltage control (which provides automatic adjustment of the deceleration rate (auto-
ramping) to avoid tripping when decelerating large inertia fans).

3-** Reference/Ramps Parameters used to program the following:


• Minimum and maximum reference limits of speed (RPM/Hz) in open loop or in actual units
when operating in closed loop).

• Digital/preset references.

• Jog speed.

• Definition of the source of each reference (for example, to which analog input is the
reference signal connected).

• Ramp-up and ramp-down times.

• Digital potentiometer settings.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 69


How to Programme Operating Instructions

Group Title Function


4-** Limits/Warnings Parameters used to program limits and warnings of operation including:
• Allowable motor direction.
• Minimum and maximum motor speeds. As an example, in pump applications the minimum
speed is often set to approximately 30–40%. This speed ensures that pump seals are always
adequately lubricated, avoid cavitation and ensure that adequate head is always produced to
create flow).

• Torque and current limits to protect the pump, fan or compressor driven by the motor.

• Warnings for low/high current, speed, reference, and feedback.

• Missing motor phase protection.

• Speed bypass frequencies, including semi-automatic set-up of these frequencies (for example,
to avoid resonance conditions on cooling tower and other fans).

5-** Digital In/Out Parameters used to programme the functions of all


6 6 • digital inputs
• digital outputs

• relay outputs

• pulse inputs

• pulse outputs

for terminals on the control card and all option cards.


6-** Analog In/Out Parameters used to programme the functions associated with all analog inputs and analog
outputs for the control card terminals and general purpose I/O option (MCB 101). The
parameters include:
• Analog input live zero time-out function (which, for example, can be used to command a
cooling tower fan to operate at full speed if the condenser water return sensor fails).

• Scaling of the analog input signals (for example to match the analog input to the mA and
pressure range of a static duct pressure sensor).

• Filter time constant to filter out electrical noise on the analog signal, which sometimes
occurs when long cables are installed.

• Function and scaling of the analog outputs (for example to provide an analog output
representing motor current or kW to an analog input of a DDC controller).

• Configuring the analog outputs to be controlled by the BMS via a high-level interface (HLI)
(for example to control a chilled water valve) including ability to define a default value of
these outputs in the event of the HLI failing.

8-** Communication and Parameters used for configuring and monitoring functions associated with the serial communi-
Options cations/high-level interface to the frequency converter.
9-** Profibus Parameters only applicable when a PROFIBUS option is installed.
10-** CAN Fieldbus Parameters only applicable when a DeviceNet option is installed.
11-** LonWorks Parameters only applicable when a LonWorks option is installed.

70 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

Group Title Function


13-** Smart Logic Controller Parameters used to configure the built-in smart logic controller (SLC). The SLC can be used for:
• Simple functions such as:
• Comparators (for example, if running above x Hz, activate output relay).

• Timers (for example, when a start signal is applied, first activate output relay to
open supply air damper and wait x seconds before ramping up).

• Complex sequence of user-defined actions executed by the SLC when the associated user-
defined event is evaluated as TRUE by the SLC. For example, initiate an economiser mode in
a simple AHU cooling application control scheme where there is no BMS. For such an
application, the SLC can monitor the outside air relative humidity. If the relative humidity is
below a defined value, the supply air temperature setpoint could be automatically increased.
With the frequency converter monitoring the outside air relative humidity and supply air
temperature via its analog inputs, and controlling the chilled water valve via one of the
extended PI(D) loops and an analog output, it would then modulate that valve to maintain a
higher supply air temperature. 6 6
The SLC can often replace the need for other external control equipment.
14-** Special Functions Parameters used to configure special functions of the frequency converter including:
• Setting of the switching frequency to reduce audible noise from the motor (sometimes
required for fan applications).

• Kinetic back-up function (especially useful for critical applications in semi-conductor instal-
lations where performance under mains dip/mains loss is important).

• Mains imbalance protection.

• Automatic reset (to avoid the need for a manual reset of alarms).

• Energy-optimisation parameters. Normally, these parameters do not need changing. Fine-


tuning of this automatic function ensures that the frequency converter and motor
combination operate at their optimum efficiency.

• Autoderating functions enabling the frequency converter to continue operation at reduced


performance under extreme operating conditions ensuring maximum up-time.

15-** FC Information Parameters providing operating data and other frequency converter information including:
• Operating and running hour counters.
• kWh counter; resetting of the running and kWh counters.

• Alarm/fault log (where the past 10 alarms are logged along with any associated value and
time).

• Frequency converter and option card identification parameters, such as code number and
software version.

16-** Data Readouts Read-only parameters which display the status/value of many operating variables that can be
displayed on the LCP or viewed in this parameter group. These parameters can be useful during
commissioning when interfacing with a BMS via a high-level interface.
18-** Info & Readouts Read-only parameters which display useful information for commissioning when interfacing with
a BMS via a high-level interface. The information contains data such as:
• The last 10 preventive maintenance log items.
• Actions and time.

• The value of analog inputs and outputs on the analog I/O option card.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 71


How to Programme Operating Instructions

Group Title Function


20-** FC Closed Loop Parameters used to configure the closed loop PI(D) controller, which controls the speed of the
pump, fan or compressor in closed-loop mode including:
• Defining where each of the 3 possible feedback signals come from (for example, which
analog input or the BMS HLI).

• Conversion factor for each of the feedback signals. An example could be a pressure signal
used for indication of flow in an AHU or converting from pressure to temperature in a
compressor application).

• Engineering unit for the reference and feedback (for example, Pa, kPa, m Wg, in Wg, bar,
m3/s, m3/h, °C, °F, etc).

• The function (for example, sum, difference, average, minimum or maximum) used to
calculate the resulting feedback for single-zone applications or the control philosophy for
multi-zone applications.


6 6
Programming of the setpoints.

• Manual tuning or auto-tuning of the PI(D) loop.

21-** Extended Closed Loop Parameters used to configure the 3 extended closed loop PI(D) controllers. The controllers can,
for example, be used to control external actuators (for example, chilled water valve to maintain
supply air temperature in a VAV system) including:
• Engineering unit for the reference and feedback of each controller (for example, °C, °F).
• Defining the range of the reference/setpoint for each controller.

• Defining where each of the references/setpoints and feedback signals come from (for
example, which analog input or the BMS HLI).

• Programming of the setpoint, and manual tuning or auto-tuning of each of the PI(D)
controllers.

22-** Application Functions Parameters used to monitor, protect and control pumps, fans and compressors, including:
• No-flow detection and protection of pumps (including auto-setup of this function).
• Dry-pump protection.

• End-of-curve detection and protection of pumps.

• Sleep mode (especially useful for cooling tower and booster pump sets).

• Broken-belt detection (typically used for fan applications to detect no air flow instead of
using a ∆p switch installed across the fan).

• Short-cycle protection of compressors and pump flow compensation of setpoint (especially


useful for secondary chilled water pump applications where the ∆p sensor has been installed
close to the pump and not across the furthest most significant load(s) in the system.

• Using this function can compensate for the sensor installation and help to realise the
maximum energy savings).

23-** Time Based Functions Time-based parameters including:


• Parameters used to initiate daily or weekly actions based on the built-in real-time clock. The
actions could be change of setpoint for night set-back mode or start/stop of the pump/fan/
compressor start/stop of an external equipment).

• Preventive maintenance functions, which can be based on running or operating hour time
intervals or on specific dates and times.

• Energy log (especially useful in retrofit applications or where information of the actual
historical load (kW) on the pump/fan/compressor is of interest).

• Trending (useful in retrofit or other applications where there is an interest to log operating
power, current, frequency or speed of the pump/fan/compressor for analysis and a payback
counter.

24-** Application Functions 2 Parameters used to set up fire mode and/or to control a bypass contactor/starter if designed
into the system.

72 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

Group Title Function


25-** Cascade Controller Parameters used to configure and monitor the built-in pump cascade controller (typically used
for pump booster sets).
26-** Analog I/O Option MCB Parameters used to configure the analog I/O option (MCB 109) including:
109 • Definition of the analog input types (for example, voltage, Pt1000 or Ni1000).
• Scaling and definition of the analog output functions and scaling.

Table 6.1 Parameter Groups

Parameter descriptions and selections are displayed on the 1. Press [Quick Menu].
graphic (GLCP) or numeric (NLCP) display. (See relevant
2. Press [▼] to select Function Set-ups.
section for details.) Access the parameters by pressing
[Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] on the LCP. The Quick Menu 3. Press [OK].
is used primarily for commissioning the unit at start-up by 4. Press [▼] to select Application Settings .
providing the parameters necessary to start operation. The
Main Menu provides access to all parameters for detailed 5. Press [OK]. 6 6
application programming. 6. Press [OK] again for Fan Functions.
7. Press [OK] to select Broken Belt Function.
All digital input/output and analog input/output terminals
are multifunctional. All terminals have factory default
8. Press [▼], to select [2] Trip.
functions suitable for most HVAC applications but if other If a broken fan-belt is detected, the frequency converter
special functions are required, they must be programmed trips.
as explained in parameter group 5-** Digital In/out or 6-**
Select Q1 My Personal Menu to display personal
Analog In/out.
parameters
For example, an AHU or pump OEM may have pre-
6.1.2 Quick Menu Mode programmed personal parameters to be in My Personal
Menu during factory commissioning to make on-site
Parameter data commissioning/fine-tuning simpler. These parameters are
The graphical display (GLCP) provides access to all selected in 0-25 My Personal Menu. Up to 20 different
parameters listed in the Quick Menu. The numeric display parameters can be programmed in this menu.
(NLCP) only provides access to the Quick Set-up
Select Changes Made to obtain information about:
parameters. To set parameters pressing [Quick Menu] -
enter or change parameter data or settings in accordance
• The last 10 changes. Press [▲] and [▼] to scroll
between the last 10 changed parameters.
with the following procedure:
1. Press [Quick Menu]. • The changes made since default setting.
Loggings
2. Press [▲] or [▼] to find the parameter to change.
Loggings show information about the display line
3. Press [OK]. readouts. The information is shown as graphs.
4. Press [▲] or [▼] to select the correct parameter Only display parameters selected in 0-20 Display Line 1.1
setting. Small and 0-24 Display Line 3 Large can be viewed. Up to
120 samples can be stored in the memory for later
5. Press [OK]. reference.
6. To move to a different digit within a parameter Quick Set-up
setting, use the [◀] and [▶].
Efficient parameter set-up for HVAC applications
7. Highlighted area indicates digit selected for The parameters can easily be set up for most HVAC
change. applications only by using the Quick Set-up.
8. Press [Cancel] to disregard change, or press [OK] After pressing [Quick Menu], the different options in the
to accept change and enter the new setting. Quick Menu are listed. See also Illustration 6.1 and Table 6.3
to Table 6.6.
Example of changing parameter data
Assume parameter 22-60 Broken Belt Function is set to [0]
Off. To monitor the fan-belt condition, non-broken or
broken, follow this procedure:

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 73


How to Programme Operating Instructions

Example of using the Quick Set-up default settings of 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and 0-03 Regional Settings
To set the ramp-down time to 100 s, follow this procedure: depend on which region of the world the frequency converter is
supplied to but can be reprogrammed as required.
1. Select Quick Set-up. Parameter 0-01 Language in
2) Parameter 5-40 Function Relay is an array. Select between [0]
Quick Set-up appears.
Relay1 or [1] Relay2. Standard setting is [0] Relay1 with the default
2. Press [▼] repeatedly until parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 option [9] Alarm.
Ramp Down Time appears with the default setting
of 20 s. For detailed information about settings and programming,
see the VLT® HVAC Drive FC 102 Programming Guide.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press [◀] to highlight the third digit before the NOTICE
comma. If [0] No Operation is selected in 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital
Input, no connection to +24 V on terminal 27 is
5. Change 0 to 1 by pressing [▲].
necessary to enable start.
6. Press [▶] to highlight the digit 2. If [2] Coast Inverse (factory default value) is selected in

6 6 7. Change 2 to 0 by pressing [▼].


5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input, a connection to +24 V is
necessary to enable start.
8. Press [OK].
The new ramp-down time is now set to 100 s. 0-01 Language
Option: Function:
130BP064.10

40.0% 4.84 A 1(1)


Quick Menus Defines display language. The frequency
Q1 My Personal Menu converter is delivered with 4 different
Q2 Quick Setup language packages. English and German
Q3 Function Setups are included in all packages. English
Q5 Changes Made cannot be erased or manipulated.

Illustration 6.1 Quick Menu View [0] * English Part of language packages 1–4

[1] Deutsch Part of language packages 1–4

[2] Francais Part of language package 1


Access the 18 most important set-up parameters of the
frequency converter via Quick Set-up. After programming, [3] Dansk Part of language package 1
the frequency converter is ready for operation. The 18
[4] Spanish Part of language package 1
Quick Set-up parameters are shown in Table 6.2.
Parameter [Units] [5] Italiano Part of language package 1
Parameter 0-01 Language
[6] Svenska Part of language package 1
Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] [kW]
Parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP] [Hp] [7] Nederlands Part of language package 1
Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage1) [V]
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency [Hz] [10] Chinese Part of language package 2

Parameter 1-24 Motor Current [A] [20] Suomi Part of language package 1
Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [RPM]
[22] English US Part of language package 4
Parameter 1-28 Motor Rotation Check [Hz]
Parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time [s] [27] Greek Part of language package 4
Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time [s]
Parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] [RPM] [28] Bras.port Part of language package 4
Parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]1) [Hz]
[36] Slovenian Part of language package 3
Parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] [RPM]
Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]1) [Hz] [39] Korean Part of language package 2
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] [RPM] [40] Japanese Part of language package 2
Parameter 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]1) [Hz]
[41] Turkish Part of language package 4
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
[42] Trad.Chinese Part of language package 2
Parameter 5-40 Function Relay2)
[43] Bulgarian Part of language package 3
Table 6.2 Quick Set-up Parameters
[44] Srpski Part of language package 3
1) The information shown in the display depends on the selections
made in 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and 0-03 Regional Settings. The [45] Romanian Part of language package 3

74 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

0-01 Language 1-24 Motor Current


Option: Function: Range: Function:
Size [ 0.10 - Enter the nominal motor current
[46] Magyar Part of language package 3
related* 10000.00 A] value from the motor nameplate
[47] Czech Part of language package 3 data. This data is used for
calculating motor torque, thermal
[48] Polski Part of language package 4 motor protection etc.
[49] Russian Part of language package 3
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
[50] Thai Part of language package 2 Range: Function:
[51] Bahasa Part of language package 2 Size related* [100 - 60000 Enter the nominal motor speed
Indonesia RPM] value from the motor nameplate
[52] Hrvatski Part of language package 3 data. This data is used for
calculating automatic motor
1-20 Motor Power [kW]
Range: Function:
compensations.
6 6
1-28 Motor Rotation Check
Size [ 0.09 - Enter the nominal motor power in kW
related* 3000.00 according to the motor nameplate data. Option: Function:
kW] The default value corresponds to the Following installation and connection of the
nominal rated output of the unit. motor, this function allows the correct motor
Depending on the selections made in rotation direction to be verified. Enabling this
0-03 Regional Settings, either function overrides any bus commands or digital
parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or inputs, except external interlock and Safe Torque
parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP] is made Off (STO) (if included).
invisible.
[0] * Off Motor rotation check is not active.

1-21 Motor Power [HP] [1] Enabled Motor rotation check is enabled.

Range: Function:
Size [ 0.09 - Enter the nominal motor power in hp WARNING
related* 3000.00 according to the motor nameplate data. Remove mains power before disconnecting motor phase
hp] The default value corresponds to the cables.
nominal rated output of the unit.
Depending on the selections made in NOTICE
0-03 Regional Settings, either
Once the motor rotation check is enabled the display
parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or
shows: Note! Motor may run in wrong direction.
parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP] is made
Pressing [OK], [Back] or [Cancel] dismisses the message
invisible.
and displays a new message: “Press [Hand On] to start
the motor. Press [Cancel] to abort”. Pressing [Hand On]
1-22 Motor Voltage
starts the motor at 5 Hz in forward direction and the
Range: Function: display shows: “Motor is running. Check if motor rotation
Size [ 10 - Enter the nominal motor voltage direction is correct. Press [Off] to stop the motor”.
related* 1000 V] according to the motor nameplate Pressing [Off] stops the motor and resets
data. The default value corresponds to parameter 1-28 Motor Rotation Check. If motor rotation
the nominal rated output of the direction is incorrect, interchange 2 motor phase cables.
frequency converter.

3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]


1-23 Motor Frequency
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size [ 0 - par. The jog speed is a fixed output speed
Size [20 - Select the motor frequency value from the
related* 4-14 Hz] at which the frequency converter is
related* 1000 motor nameplate data. For 87 Hz operation
running when the jog function is
Hz] with 230/400 V motors, set the nameplate
activated.
data for 230 V/50 Hz. Adapt
See also 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
and 3-03 Maximum Reference to the 87 Hz
application.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 75


How to Programme Operating Instructions

3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [ 1.00 - Enter the ramp-up time, that is, the Size [ par. NOTICE
related* 3600 s] acceleration time from 0 RPM to related* 4-11 -
Any changes in parameter 4-13 Motor
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. 60000
Speed High Limit [RPM] reset the value
Select a ramp-up time such that the RPM]
in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High
output current does not exceed the
to the value set in
current limit in 4-18 Current Limit during
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
ramping. See ramp-down time in
[RPM].
parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time.

par .3 − 41 =
tacc × nnom par .1 − 25
ref RPM
s NOTICE
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time Max. output frequency cannot exceed
10% of the inverter switching
Range: Function:
6 6 Size [ 1.00 - Enter the ramp-down time, that is, the
frequency (parameter 14-01 Switching
Frequency).
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed to 0
Enter the maximum limit for motor speed in
RPM. Select a ramp-down time preventing
RPM. The motor speed high limit can be set
overvoltage from arising in the inverter due
to correspond to the manufacturer’s
to regenerative operation of the motor. The
maximum rated motor. The motor speed
ramp-down time should also be long
high limit must exceed the setting in
enough to prevent that the generated
parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM].
current exceeds the current limit set in
The parameter name appears as either
4-18 Current Limit. See ramp-up time in
parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time.
or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz],
tdec × nnom par .1 − 25 depending on:
par .3 − 42 = s
ref RPM
• The settings of other parameters in
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] the Main Menu.
Range: Function:
• Default settings based on
Size [ 0 - par. Enter the minimum limit for motor speed geographical location.
related* 4-13 in RPM. The motor speed low limit can be
RPM] set to correspond to the manufacturer’s 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
recommended minimum motor speed.
Range: Function:
The motor speed low limit must not
Size [ par. Enter the maximum limit for motor speed
exceed the setting in
related* 4-12 - in Hz. Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
par. Limit [Hz] can match the manufacturer's
[RPM].
4-19 Hz] recommended maximum motor speed. The
motor speed high limit must exceed the
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
value in parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low
Range: Function:
Limit [Hz]. The output frequency must not
Size [0 - Enter the minimum limit for motor speed exceed 10% of the switching frequency
related* par. 4-14 in Hz. The motor speed low limit can be (parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency).
Hz] set to correspond to the minimum output
frequency of the motor shaft. The speed
low limit must not exceed the setting in
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

76 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

6.1.3 Function Set-ups 4. Function Set-ups options appear. Select Q3-1


General Settings. Press [OK].
The Function Set-up provides quick and easy access to all

130BT113.10
28.4% 2.05A 1(1)
parameters required for most HVAC applications including:
Function Setups Q3

• Most VAV and CAV supply and return fans. Q3-1 General Settings

Q3-2 Open Loop Settings


• Cooling tower fans.
Q3-3 Closed Loop Settings
• Primary pumps.
Q3-4 Application Settings
• Secondary pumps.
Illustration 6.5 Function Set-ups Options
• Condenser water pumps.

• Other pump, fan and compressor applications.


How to access Function Set-up - example 5. Press [▲] and [▼] to scroll down to Q3-11 Analog

6 6
1. Turn on the frequency converter (yellow LED Outputs. Press [OK].
lights).

130BT114.10
26.0% 7.14A 1(1)
General Settings Q3-1
130BT110.11

Status 1 (1)
28.8% 5.66A 2.63kW Q3 - 10 Adv. Motor Settings
Q3 - 11 Analog Output
Q3 - 12 Clock Settings
14.4Hz
Q3 - 13 Display Settings

Illustration 6.6 General Settings Options


0kWh
Auto Remote Running

Illustration 6.2 Frequency Converter Turned on 6. Select parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output. Press
[OK].

130BA115.10
2. Press [Quick Menus]. 26.3% 5.82A 1(1)
Analog Output 03.11
130BT111.10

13.7% 13.0A 1(1) 6 - 50 Terminal 42 Output


Quick Menus (100) Output frequency
Q1 My Personal Menu
Illustration 6.7 Parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output Selected
Q2 Quick Setup

Q3 Function Setups

Q5 Changes Made 7. Press [▲] and [▼] to select between the different
Illustration 6.3 Quick Menu Selected options. Press [OK].
130BT116.10

43.4% 7.99A 1(1)


Analog Output Q3-11
3. Press [▲] and [▼] to scroll down to Function Set- 6-50 Terminal 42 Output
ups. Press [OK].
[107] Speed
130BT112.10

69.3% 5.20A 1(1)


Quick Menus Illustration 6.8 Setting a Parameter

Q1 My Personal Menu

Q2 Quick Setup

Q3 Function Setups

Q5 Changes Made

Illustration 6.4 Scrolling to Function Set-up

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 77


How to Programme Operating Instructions

Function Set-ups parameters


The Function Set-ups parameters are grouped in the following way:

Q3-10 Adv. motor settings Q3-11 Analog output Q3-12 Clock settings Q3-13 Display settings
Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 0-70 Date and Time 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
Protection Output
Parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source Parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 0-71 Date Format 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small
Output Min Scale
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 0-72 Time Format 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small
Adaptation (AMA) Output Max Scale
Parameter 14-01 Switching 0-74 DST/Summertime 0-23 Display Line 2 Large
Frequency
Parameter 4-53 Warning Speed 0-76 DST/Summertime Start 0-24 Display Line 3 Large
High
0-77 DST/Summertime End 0-37 Display Text 1
6 6 0-38 Display Text 2
0-39 Display Text 3

Table 6.3 Q3-1 General Settings

Q3-20 Digital reference Q3-21 Analog reference


Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference
3-03 Maximum Reference 3-03 Maximum Reference
Parameter 3-10 Preset Reference Parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input Parameter 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input 6-13 Terminal 53 High Current
Parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Table 6.4 Q3-2 Open-loop Settings

Q3-30 Single zone int. setpoint Q3-31 Single zone ext. setpoint Q3-32 Multi zone/adv
Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source
20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. 20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. Parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source
20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. 20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. Parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current Parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage Parameter 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion
Parameter 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Parameter 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit
Value
Parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current Parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source
Value
Parameter 6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time 6-13 Terminal 53 High Current Parameter 20-04 Feedback 2 Conversion
Constant
Parameter 6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero Parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. 20-05 Feedback 2 Source Unit
Value
Parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time Parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source
Value
Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current Parameter 20-07 Feedback 3 Conversion
Parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1 Parameter 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. 20-08 Feedback 3 Source Unit
Value
Parameter 20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control Parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit
Value
20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM] Parameter 6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time 20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb.
Constant
20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz] Parameter 6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero 20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.

78 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

Q3-30 Single zone int. setpoint Q3-31 Single zone ext. setpoint Q3-32 Multi zone/adv
Parameter 20-93 PID Proportional Gain Parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time Parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
Parameter 20-94 PID Integral Time Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function Parameter 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
20-70 Closed Loop Type Parameter 20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
20-71 PID Performance 20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM] 6-13 Terminal 53 High Current
20-72 PID Output Change 20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz] Parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value
20-73 Minimum Feedback Level Parameter 20-93 PID Proportional Gain Parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.
Value
20-74 Maximum Feedback Level Parameter 20-94 PID Integral Time Parameter 6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time
Constant
20-79 PID Autotuning 20-70 Closed Loop Type Parameter 6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero
20-71 PID Performance Parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage
20-72 PID Output Change Parameter 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
20-73 Minimum Feedback Level
20-74 Maximum Feedback Level
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current
6 6
20-79 PID Autotuning Parameter 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value
Parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
Value
Parameter 6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time
Constant
Parameter 6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero
Parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low
Parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High
Parameter 20-20 Feedback Function
Parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1
Parameter 20-22 Setpoint 2
Parameter 20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control
20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]
20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz]
Parameter 20-93 PID Proportional Gain
Parameter 20-94 PID Integral Time
20-70 Closed Loop Type
20-71 PID Performance
20-72 PID Output Change
20-73 Minimum Feedback Level
20-74 Maximum Feedback Level
20-79 PID Autotuning

Table 6.5 Q3-3 Closed-loop Settings

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 79


How to Programme Operating Instructions

Q3-40 Fan functions Q3-41 Pump functions Q3-42 Compressor functions


Parameter 22-60 Broken Belt Function 22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up Parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics
Parameter 22-61 Broken Belt Torque Parameter 22-21 Low Power Detection Parameter 1-71 Start Delay
Parameter 22-62 Broken Belt Delay Parameter 22-22 Low Speed Detection Parameter 22-75 Short Cycle Protection
Parameter 4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up Parameter 22-23 No-Flow Function Parameter 22-76 Interval between Starts
Parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics Parameter 22-24 No-Flow Delay Parameter 22-77 Minimum Run Time
Parameter 22-22 Low Speed Detection Parameter 22-40 Minimum Run Time Parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
Parameter 22-23 No-Flow Function Parameter 22-41 Minimum Sleep Time Parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
Parameter 22-24 No-Flow Delay Parameter 22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM] 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
Parameter 22-40 Minimum Run Time 22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz] 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input
Parameter 22-41 Minimum Sleep Time 22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference Parameter 5-40 Function Relay
Parameter 22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM] 22-45 Setpoint Boost Parameter 1-73 Flying Start
22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz] 22-46 Maximum Boost Time 1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]
22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference Parameter 22-26 Dry Pump Function 1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz]

6 6 22-45 Setpoint Boost


22-46 Maximum Boost Time
22-27 Dry Pump Delay
22-80 Flow Compensation
Parameter 2-10 Brake Function 22-81 Square-linear Curve Approximation
2-16 AC brake Max. Current 22-82 Work Point Calculation
Parameter 2-17 Over-voltage Control 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]
Parameter 1-73 Flying Start 22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz]
Parameter 1-71 Start Delay 22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]
Parameter 1-80 Function at Stop 22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz]
Parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current 22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed
Parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction 22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed
22-89 Flow at Design Point
22-90 Flow at Rated Speed
Parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics
Parameter 1-73 Flying Start

Table 6.6 Q3-4 Application Settings

1-00 Configuration Mode NOTICE


Option: Function: When set for closed loop, the commands reversing and
NOTICE start reversing do not reverse the motor direction.

This parameter cannot be adjusted while


the motor is running. 1-03 Torque Characteristics
Option: Function:
[0] Open Motor speed is determined by applying a speed [0] Compressor For speed control of screw and scroll
Loop reference or by setting desired speed when in torque compressors. Provides a voltage which is
Hand mode. optimised for a constant torque load charac-
Open loop is also used if the frequency converter teristic of the motor in the entire range down
is of a closed loop control system based on an to 10 Hz.
external PID controller providing a speed reference
[1] Variable For speed control of centrifugal pumps and
signal as output.
torque fans. Also to be used when controlling more
[3] Closed Motor speed is determined by a reference from the than 1 motor from the same frequency
Loop built-in PID controller varying the motor speed as converter (for example, multiple condenser
of a closed-loop control process (for example, fans or cooling tower fans). Provides a
constant pressure or flow). Configure the PID voltage which is optimised for a squared
controller in parameter group 20-** Feedback or via torque load characteristic of the motor.
the Function Set-ups accessed by pressing [Quick
[2] Auto Energy For optimum energy-efficient speed control
Menus].
Optim. CT of screw and scroll compressors. Provides a
voltage which is optimised for a constant
torque load characteristic of the motor in the
entire range down to 15 Hz. In addition, the

80 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

1-03 Torque Characteristics 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)


Option: Function: Option: Function:
AEO feature adapts the voltage exactly to the advanced motor parameters (1-30 Stator
current load situation, thereby reducing Resistance (Rs) to 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)) at
energy consumption and audible noise from motor standstill.
the motor. To obtain optimum performance,
[0] * Off No function.
set the motor power factor cos phi correctly.
This value is set in 14-43 Motor Cosphi. The [1] Enable Performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the
parameter has a default value which is Complete rotor resistance Rr, the stator leakage
automatically adjusted when the motor data AMA reactance X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2
is programmed. These settings ensure and the main reactance Xh.
optimum motor voltage. If the motor power [2] Enable Performs a reduced AMA of the stator
factor cos phi requires tuning, an AMA Reduced resistance Rs in the system only. Select this
function can be carried out using AMA option if an LC filter is used between the
parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
(AMA). It is rarely necessary to adjust the
frequency converter and the motor.
6 6
motor power factor parameter manually. NOTICE
[3] Auto Energy For optimum energy-efficient speed control Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) has no
* Optim. VT of centrifugal pumps and fans. Provides a effect when 1-10 Motor Construction=[1] PM, non-salient
voltage optimised for a squared torque load SPM.
characteristic of the motor. In addition, the
AEO feature adapts the voltage exactly to the
Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand On] after
current load situation, thereby reducing
selecting [1] Enable complete AMA or [2] Enable reduced
energy consumption and audible noise from
AMA. See also the section Automatic Motor Adaptation in
the motor. To obtain optimum performance,
the design guide. After a normal sequence, the display
set the motor power factor cos phi correctly.
reads: Press [OK] to finish AMA. After pressing [OK], the
This value is set in 14-43 Motor Cosphi. The
frequency converter is ready for operation.
parameter has a default value and is
automatically adjusted when the motor data
is programmed. These settings ensure NOTICE
optimum motor voltage. If the motor power
factor cos phi requires tuning, an AMA
• For the best adaptation of the frequency
converter, run AMA on a cold motor.
function can be carried out using
parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation • AMA cannot be performed while the motor is
(AMA). It is rarely necessary to adjust the running.
motor power factor parameter manually.

NOTICE NOTICE
Avoid generating external torque during AMA.
Parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics has no effect when
1-10 Motor Construction=[1] PM, non-salient SPM.
NOTICE
NOTICE If one of the settings in parameter group 1-2* Motor
Data is changed, 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to 1-39 Motor
For pumps or fan applications where the viscosity or
Poles return to default settings.
density can vary significantly, or where excessive flow
can occur, select [2] Auto Energy Optim. CT.
NOTICE
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) Only run complete AMA without filter, and only run
reduced AMA with filter.
Option: Function:
NOTICE See section: Application Examples > Automatic Motor
This parameter cannot be adjusted Adaptation in the design guide.
while the motor is running.

The AMA function optimises dynamic motor


performance by automatically optimising the

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 81


How to Programme Operating Instructions

1-71 Start Delay 1-70 PM Start Mode=[1] Parking:


Range: Function: A speed estimate lower than the setting in 1-59 Flystart
Test Pulses Frequency engages the parking function (see
00 s* [0 - When the frequency converter receives the start
2-06 Parking Current and 2-07 Parking Time). Otherwise, the
120 s] command, it delays motor start for the time
frequency converter catches the motor at that speed and
specified in this parameter.
resumes normal operation. Refer to the description of
The function selected in parameter 1-80 Function
1-70 PM Start Mode for recommended settings.
at Stop is active in the delay period.

1-73 Flying Start Current limitations of the flying-start principle used for PM
motors:
Option: Function:
• The speed range is up to 100% nominal speed or
This function enables catching a motor which is the field weakening speed (whichever is lowest).
spinning freely due to a mains drop-out.

When parameter 1-73 Flying Start is enabled,


• PMSM with high back EMF (>300 VLL(rms)) and
high winding inductance (>10 mH) needs more
parameter 1-71 Start Delay has no function.
6 6 Search direction for flying start is linked to the
time for reducing short-circuit current to 0 and
may be susceptible to error in estimation.
setting in parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction.
[0] Clockwise: Flying start searches in clockwise • Current testing limited to a speed range up to
direction. If not successful, a DC brake is activated. 300 Hz. For certain units, the limit is 250 Hz; all
[2] Both Directions: The flying start first makes a 200-240 V units up to and including 2.2 kW and
search in the direction determined by the last all 380-480 V units up to and including 4 kW.
reference (direction). If the speed is not found, it • Prepared for salient pole machine (IPMSM) but
makes a search in the other direction. If not not yet verified on those types of machine.
successful, a DC brake is activated in the time set
in 2-02 DC Braking Time. Start then takes place
• For high-inertia applications (that is, where the
load inertia is more than 30 times larger than the
from 0 Hz.
motor inertia), use a brake resistor to avoid
[0] Disabled Select [0] Disable if this function is not required. overvoltage trip during high-speed engagement
[1] Enabled Select [1] Enable to enable the frequency converter of the flying-start function.
to catch and control a spinning motor. 1-80 Function at Stop
The parameter is always set to [1] Enable when Option: Function:
1-10 Motor Construction=[1] PM non-salient. Select the frequency converter function after a
Important related parameters: stop command or after the speed is ramped
• 1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current down to the settings in 1-81 Min Speed for
Function at Stop [RPM].
• 1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency
Available selections depend on 1-10 Motor
• 1-70 PM Start Mode
Construction:
• 2-06 Parking Current [0] Asynchronous:
• 2-07 Parking Time [0] Coast
• 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] [1] DC hold
• 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] [2] Motor check, warning
• 2-06 Parking Current [6] Motor check, alarm
• 2-07 Parking Time [1] PM non-salient:

The flying-start function used for PM motors is based on [0] Coast


an initial speed estimation. The speed is always estimated [0] * Coast Leaves motor in free mode.
as the first thing after an active start signal is given. Based
[1] DC Hold/ Energises motor with a DC hold current (see
on the setting of 1-70 PM Start Mode the following
Motor parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current).
happens:
Preheat
1-70 PM Start Mode=[0] Rotor Detection:
[2] Motor Issues a warning if the motor is not
If the speed estimate appears as greater than 0 Hz, the
check, connected.
frequency converter catches the motor at that speed and
warning
resumes normal operation. Otherwise, the frequency
[6] Motor Issues an alarm if the motor is not connected.
converter estimates the rotor position and start normal
check,
operation from there.
alarm

82 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection

175ZA052.12
t [s]
Option: Function:
2000
The frequency converter determines the
1000
motor temperature for motor overload 600
protection in 2 different ways: 500
400
• Via a thermistor sensor connected 300
to one of the analog or digital 200
fOUT = 1 x f M,N(par. 1-23)
inputs (parameter 1-93 Thermistor 100
fOUT = 2 x f M,N
Source). 60
50 fOUT = 0.2 x f M,N
• Via calculation (ETR=electronic 40
thermal relay) of the thermal load, 30
based on the actual load and time. 20 IM
10
The calculated thermal load is 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 IMN(par. 1-24)
compared with the rated motor
current IM,N and the rated motor
Illustration 6.9 Thermal Motor Protection
6 6
frequency fM,N. The calculations
estimate the need for a lower load
at lower speed due to less cooling WARNING
from the fan incorporated in the To maintain PELV, all connections made to the control
motor. terminals must be PELV, for example, thermistor must be
reinforced/double insulated.
[0] No If the motor is continuously overloaded, and
protection no warning or trip of frequency converter is
wanted. NOTICE
[1] Thermistor Activates a warning when the connected Danfoss recommends using 24 V DC as thermistor supply
warning thermistor in the motor reacts in the event of voltage.
motor overtemperature.

[2] Thermistor Stops (trips) the frequency converter when NOTICE


trip the connected thermistor in the motor reacts The ETR timer function does not work when 1-10 Motor
in the event of motor overtemperature. Construction=[1] PM, non-salient SPM.
[3] ETR warning
1 NOTICE
[4] ETR trip 1 For correct operation of the ETR function, the setting in
[5] ETR warning parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics must fit the
2 application (see description of parameter 1-03 Torque
[6] ETR trip 2 Characteristics).
[7] ETR warning
3
[8] ETR trip 3
[9] ETR warning
4
[10] ETR trip 4

ETR functions 1-4 calculate the load when the set-up


where they were selected is active. For example ETR-3
starts calculating when set-up 3 is selected. For the North
American market: The ETR functions provide class 20
motor overload protection in accordance with NEC.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 83


How to Programme Operating Instructions

1-93 Thermistor Source NOTICE


Option: Function: The maximum value depends on the rated motor
NOTICE current.
Avoid 100% current for too long. It may damage the
This parameter cannot be adjusted
motor.
while the motor is running.

2-10 Brake Function


NOTICE
Option: Function:
Set digital input to [0] PNP - Active at
Available selections depend on 1-10 Motor
24 V in 5-00 Digital I/O Mode.
Construction:
[0] Asynchron:
Select the input to which the thermistor (PTC
sensor) should be connected. An analog [0] Off
input option [1] Analog Input 53 or [2] Analog [1] Resistor brake

6 6 Input 54 cannot be selected if the analog


input is already in use as a reference source
[2] AC brake

(selected in parameter 3-15 Reference 1 [1] PM non-salient:


Source, parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source or [0] Off
3-17 Reference 3 Source).
[1] Resistor brake
When using VLT PTC thermistor card MCB
112, [0] None must always be selected. [0] Off No brake resistor installed.

[0] * None [1] Resistor Brake resistor incorporated in the system, for
[1] Analog brake dissipation of surplus brake energy as heat.
Input 53 Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DC-
link voltage during braking (generating operation).
[2] Analog
The resistor brake function is only active in
Input 54
frequency converters with an integral dynamic
[3] Digital input
brake.
18
[4] Digital input [2] AC brake AC brake only works in compressor torque mode
19 in parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics.
[5] Digital input
32 2-17 Over-voltage Control
[6] Digital input Option: Function:
33
NOTICE
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current Parameter 2-17 Over-voltage Control has no
Range: Function: effect when 1-10 Motor Construction=[1]
PM, non-salient SPM.
50 [0 - Enter a value for holding current as a percentage
%* 160 %] of the rated motor current IM,N set in
parameter 1-24 Motor Current. 100% DC hold NOTICE
current corresponds to IM,N. The ramp time is automatically adjusted to
This parameter holds the motor (holding torque) avoid tripping of the frequency converter.
or preheats the motor.
This parameter is active if [1] DC hold/Motor
[0] Disabled No OVC required.
Preheat is selected in parameter 1-80 Function at
Stop. [2] * Enabled Activates OVC.

NOTICE
Parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current has no effect
when 1-10 Motor Construction=[1] PM, non-salient SPM.

84 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

3-02 Minimum Reference

130BB036.10
P3-03
Range: Function:
Size [ -999999.999 - Enter the minimum reference. The
related* par. 3-03 minimum reference is the lowest
ReferenceFeed- value obtainable by summing all
backUnit] references. The minimum
reference value and unit match
the configuration made in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode P3-02
and 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit.

NOTICE
This parameter is used in
open loop only.

6 6
3-04 Reference Function
P3-10
Option: Function: 0 50 100%
[0] Sum Sums both external and preset reference
Illustration 6.10 Preset Reference
sources.

[1] External/ Use either the preset or the external reference


Preset source.

130BA149.10
Shift between external and preset via a 12 (+24V)
command on a digital input. Preset 76543210

10101010 29 [P 5-13=Preset ref. bit 0]


3-10 Preset Reference
Array [8] 11001100 32 [P 5-14=Preset ref. bit 1]

Range: Function: 11110000 33 [P 5-15=Preset ref. bit 2]


0 %* [-100 - Enter up to 8 different preset references (0-7) in
100 %] this parameter, using array programming. The
preset reference is stated as a percentage of the
value RefMAX (3-03 Maximum Reference, for Illustration 6.11 Preset Reference Scheme
closed loop see 20-14 Maximum Reference/
Feedb.). When using preset references, select
Preset ref. bit 0/1/2 [16], [17] or [18] for the 3-15 Reference 1 Source
corresponding digital inputs in parameter group
Option: Function:
5-1* Digital Inputs.
NOTICE
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is
running.

Select the reference input to be used


for the first reference signal.
Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source,
parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source and
3-17 Reference 3 Source define up to 3
different reference signals. The sum
of these reference signals defines the
actual reference.

[0] No function
[1] * Analog Input 53
[2] Analog Input 54
[7] Pulse input 29
[8] Pulse input 33

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 85


How to Programme Operating Instructions

3-15 Reference 1 Source NOTICE


Option: Function: The setting in parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction has
[20] Digital pot.meter impact on the flying start in parameter 1-73 Flying Start.
[21] Analog input X30/11
[22] Analog input X30/12 4-53 Warning Speed High
[23] Analog Input X42/1
Range: Function:
[24] Analog Input X42/3
[25] Analog Input X42/5
Size [ par. NOTICE
related* 4-52 -
[29] Analog Input X48/2 Any changes in parameter 4-13 Motor
par.
[30] Ext. Closed Loop 1 Speed High Limit [RPM] reset the value
4-13
[31] Ext. Closed Loop 2 in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High
RPM]
[32] Ext. Closed Loop 3
to the value in parameter 4-13 Motor
Speed High Limit [RPM].
3-16 Reference 2 Source If a different value is needed in

6 6 Option: Function: parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High, it


must be set after programming
NOTICE parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
This parameter cannot be [RPM]
adjusted while the motor is
running. Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor speed
exceeds this limit (nHIGH), the display reads
Select the reference input to be SPEED HIGH. The signal outputs can be
used for the second reference programmed to produce a status signal on
signal. Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 terminal 27 or 29 and on relay output 01 or
Source, parameter 3-16 Reference 2 02. Programme the upper signal limit of the
Source and 3-17 Reference 3 Source motor speed, nHIGH, within the normal
define up to 3 different reference working range of the frequency converter.
signals. The sum of these reference
signals defines the actual reference. 4-56 Warning Feedback Low
[0] No function Range: Function:
[1] Analog Input 53 -999999.999 [ -999999.999 - Enter the lower feedback
[2] Analog Input 54 ProcessCtrlUnit* par. 4-57 limit. When the feedback
[7] Pulse input 29 ProcessCtrlUnit] drops below this limit, the
[8] Pulse input 33 display reads FeedbLow.
[20] * Digital pot.meter The signal outputs can be
[21] Analog input X30/11 programmed to produce a
[22] Analog input X30/12 status signal on terminal
[23] Analog Input X42/1 27 or 29 and on relay
output 01 or 02.
[24] Analog Input X42/3
[25] Analog Input X42/5
4-57 Warning Feedback High
[29] Analog Input X48/2
[30] Ext. Closed Loop 1 Range: Function:
[31] Ext. Closed Loop 2 999999.999 [ par. 4-56 - Enter the upper feedback
[32] Ext. Closed Loop 3 ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999 limit. When the feedback
ProcessCtrlUnit] exceeds this limit, the
4-10 Motor Speed Direction display reads FeedbHigh.
Option: Function: The signal outputs can be
Selects the motor speed direction required. programmed to produce a
Use this parameter to prevent unwanted status signal on terminal
reversing. 27 or 29 and on relay
output 01 or 02.
[0] Clockwise Only operation in clockwise direction is
allowed.

[2] * Both directions Operation in both clockwise and counter-


clockwise direction is allowed.

86 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up Digital input function Select Terminal

Option: Function: Speed up [21] All


Speed down [22] All
[0] * Off No function.
Set-up select bit 0 [23] All
[1] Enabled Starts the semi-automatic bypass set-up and Set-up select bit 1 [24] All
continues with the procedure described above.
Pulse input [32] Terminal 29, 33
Ramp bit 0 [34] All
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
Mains failure inverse [36] All
Option: Function: Fire mode [37] All
NOTICE Run permissive [52] All
This parameter cannot be adjusted while Hand start [53] All
the unit is running. Auto start [54] All
DigiPot increase [55] All
[0] * Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input. DigiPot decrease [56] All

[1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output.


DigiPot clear
Counter A (up)
[57]
[60]
All
29, 33
6 6
Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
Reset counter A [62] All
Option: Function:
Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33
NOTICE Counter B (down) [64] 29, 33
This parameter cannot be adjusted while Reset counter B [65] All
the motor is running. Sleep mode [66] All
Reset maintenance word [78] All
[0] * Input Defines terminal 29 as a digital input. PTC card 1 [80] All
Lead pump start [120] All
[1] Output Defines terminal 29 as a digital output.
Lead pump alternation [121] All
Pump 1 interlock [130] All
6.1.4 5-1* Digital Inputs Pump 2 interlock [131] All
Pump 3 interlock [132] All
Parameters for configuring the input functions for the
input terminals.
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions
The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
in the frequency converter. All digital inputs can be set to
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
the following functions:
input.

Digital input function Select Terminal 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input


No operation [0] All *terminal 19, 32, 33
The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
Reset [1] All parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
Coast inverse [2] 27
Coast and reset inverse [3] All 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input
DC brake inverse [5] All The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
Stop inverse [6] All parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
External interlock [7] All input.
Start [8] All *terminal 18
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input
Latched start [9] All
Reversing [10] All The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
Start reversing [11] All
Jog [14] All *terminal 29
Preset reference on [15] All
Preset ref bit 0 [16] All
Preset ref bit 1 [17] All
Preset ref bit 2 [18] All
Freeze reference [19] All
Freeze output [20] All

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 87


How to Programme Operating Instructions

5-40 Function Relay 5-40 Function Relay


Array [8] Array [8]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1] (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1]
Option MCB 105: Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7] and Relay 9 [8]). Option MCB 105: Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7] and Relay 9 [8]).
Select options to define the function of the relays. Select options to define the function of the relays.
The selection of each mechanical relay is realised in an array The selection of each mechanical relay is realised in an array
parameter. parameter.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] No operation [71] Logic rule 1
[1] Control Ready [72] Logic rule 2
[2] Drive ready [73] Logic rule 3
[3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl [74] Logic rule 4
[4] Standby / no warning [75] Logic rule 5
[5] Running Default setting for relay [80] SL digital output A
6 6 2. [81] SL digital output B
[6] Running / no warning [82] SL digital output C
[8] Run on ref/no warn [83] SL digital output D
[9] Alarm Default setting for relay [84] SL digital output E
1. [85] SL digital output F
[160] No alarm
[10] Alarm or warning
[161] Running reverse
[11] At torque limit
[165] Local ref active
[12] Out of current range
[166] Remote ref active
[13] Below current, low
[167] Start command activ
[14] Above current, high
[168] Hand / Off
[15] Out of speed range
[169] Auto mode
[16] Below speed, low
[180] Clock Fault
[17] Above speed, high
[181] Prev. Maintenance
[18] Out of feedb. range
[188] AHF Capacitor Connect
[19] Below feedback, low
[189] External Fan Control
[20] Above feedback, high
[190] No-Flow
[21] Thermal warning
[191] Dry Pump
[25] Reverse
[192] End Of Curve
[26] Bus OK
[193] Sleep Mode
[27] Torque limit & stop
[194] Broken Belt
[28] Brake, no brake war
[195] Bypass Valve Control
[29] Brake ready, no fault
[196] Fire Mode
[30] Brake fault (IGBT)
[197] Fire Mode was Act.
[33] Safe stop active
[198] Drive Bypass
[35] External Interlock
[211] Cascade Pump 1
[36] Control word bit 11
[212] Cascade Pump 2
[37] Control word bit 12
[213] Cascade Pump 3
[40] Out of ref range
[41] Below reference, low
[42] Above ref, high
[45] Bus ctrl.
[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout
[47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout
[60] Comparator 0
[61] Comparator 1
[62] Comparator 2
[63] Comparator 3
[64] Comparator 4
[65] Comparator 5
[70] Logic rule 0

88 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time

130BA038.13
Ref./Feedback

Range: Function: [RPM]

10 s* [1 - Enter the live zero timeout time period. Live zero Par 6-xx
High Ref./ 1500
99 s] timeout time is active for analog inputs, that is,
Feedb. Value'
terminal 53 or terminal 54, used as reference or 1200
feedback sources. If the reference signal value
900
associated with the selected current input drops
below 50% of the value set in 600
parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage,
Par 6-xx 300
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, Low Ref./ 150
parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or Feedb. Value'
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a time period 1V 5V 10 V [V]
Par 6-xx Analog input
longer than the time set in parameter 6-00 Live
'Low Voltage'or
Zero Timeout Time, the function selected in 'Low Current'
parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function is
activated.
Par 6-xx
'High Voltage'or 6 6
'High Current'

6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function Illustration 6.12 Live Zero Conditions

Option: Function:
Select the time out function. The function set
in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function is 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
activated if the input signal on terminal 53 or Range: Function:
54 is below 50% of the value in 0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Enter the low-voltage value. This analog
parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage, 6-11 V] input scaling value should correspond to
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, the low reference/feedback value set in
parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb.
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a time period Value.
defined in parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout
Time. If several time outs occur simultaneously, 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
the frequency converter prioritises the time
Range: Function:
out functions as follows
10 V* [ par. 6-10 Enter the high-voltage value. This analog
1. Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout - 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to the
Function high reference/feedback value set in
2. 8-04 Control Timeout Function parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.
The output frequency of the frequency
converter can be:
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
• [1] frozen at the present value
Range: Function:
• [2] overruled to stop
0* [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling value that
• [3] overruled to jog speed 999999.999 ] corresponds to the low voltage/low
• [4] overruled to max. speed current set in parameter 6-10 Terminal 53
Low Voltage and 6-12 Terminal 53 Low
• [5] overruled to stop with subsequent
Current.
trip

[0] * Off 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value


[1] Freeze
Range: Function:
output
Size [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling
[2] Stop
related* 999999.999 ] value that corresponds to the high
[3] Jogging
voltage/high current value set in
[4] Max. speed parameter 6-11 Terminal 53 High
[5] Stop and Voltage and 6-13 Terminal 53 High
trip Current.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 89


How to Programme Operating Instructions

6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 NOTICE 100* [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling value
s] 999999.999 ] that corresponds to the high voltage/
This parameter cannot be adjusted
high current value set in
while the motor is running.
parameter 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
and 6-23 Terminal 54 High Current.
Enter the filter time constant. This
constant is a first-order digital low-pass
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
filter time for suppressing electrical noise
Range: Function:
in terminal 53. A high value improves
dampening, but also increases the delay 0.001 s* [0.001 - NOTICE
through the filter. 10 s]
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero
6 6 Option: Function: Enter the filter time constant. This is a
Disables the live zero monitoring, for example if first-order digital low-pass filter time
the analog outputs are used as part of a constant for suppressing electrical noise in
decentral I/O system (i.e. if these are used to feed terminal 54. A high time constant value
a Building Management System with data, and improves dampening but also increases
not as part of any control functions related to the the time delay through the filter.
frequency converter).
6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero
[0] Disabled
[1] * Enabled Option: Function:
Disables the live zero monitoring, for example if
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage the analog outputs are used as part of a
Range: Function: decentral I/O system (i.e. if these are used to feed
0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Enter the low-voltage value. This analog a Building Management System with data, and
6-21 V] input scaling value should correspond to not as part of any control functions related to the
the low reference/feedback value, set in frequency converter).
parameter 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. [0] Disabled
Value. [1] * Enabled

6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 6-50 Terminal 42 Output


Range: Function: Option: Function:
10 V* [ par. 6-20 Enter the high-voltage value. This analog Select the function of terminal 42 as an
- 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to the analog current output. A motor current
high reference/feedback value set in of 20 mA corresponds to Imax.
parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
[0] No operation
Value.
[100] Output freq. 0–100 Hz, (0–20 mA)
0-100
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
[101] Reference Min- Minimum reference - Maximum
Range: Function: Max reference, (0–20 mA)
0* [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling value that
[102] Feedback +-200% -200% to +200% of 20-14 Maximum
999999.999 ] corresponds to the low voltage/low
Reference/Feedb., (0–20 mA)
current value set in
parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage [103] Motor cur. 0-Imax 0 - Inverter Max. Current (16-37 Inv.
and 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current. Max. Current), (0-20 mA)

[104] Torque 0-Tlim 0 - Torque limit (4-16 Torque Limit


Motor Mode), (0-20 mA)

[105] Torque 0-Tnom 0 - Motor rated torque, (0-20 mA)

[106] Power 0-Pnom 0 - Motor rated power, (0-20 mA)

90 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

6-50 Terminal 42 Output 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale


Option: Function: Range: Function:
[107] Speed 0-HighLim 0 - Speed High Limit Set the value to be the percentage of the full
(parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit range of the variable selected in
[RPM] and parameter 4-14 Motor Speed parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.
High Limit [Hz]), (0-20 mA)
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale
[113] Ext. Closed Loop 0-100%, (0-20 mA)
1 Range: Function:
[114] Ext. Closed Loop 0-100%, (0-20 mA) 100 [0 - Scale for the maximum output (20 mA) of the
2 %* 200 analog signal at terminal 42.
[115] Ext. Closed Loop 0-100%, (0-20 mA) %] Set the value to be the percentage of the full
3 range of the variable selected in
[130] Out frq 0-100 0-100 Hz parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.
4-20mA
Current
6 6

130BA075.12
[131] Reference Minimum Reference - Maximum (mA)

4-20mA Reference 20

[132] Feedback -200% to +200% of 20-14 Maximum


4-20mA Reference/Feedb.
0/4
[133] Motor cur. 0 - Inverter Max. Current (16-37 Inv.
0% Analogue Analogue 100% Variable
4-20mA Max. Current) output Output for
Min Scale Max Scale output
[134] Torq.0-lim 4-20 0 - Torque limit (4-16 Torque Limit par. 6-93 par. 6-94 example:
Speed
mA Motor Mode) (RPM)

[135] Torq.0-nom 0 - Motor rated torque Illustration 6.13 Output Current vs Reference
4-20mA Variable
[136] Power 4-20mA 0 - Motor rated power

[137] Speed 4-20mA 0 - Speed High Limit


It is possible to obtain a value lower than 20 mA
(parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
at full scale by programming values >100% by
[RPM] and parameter 4-14 Motor Speed
using a formula as follows:
High Limit [Hz])

[139] Bus ctrl. 0–100%, (0–20 mA) 20 mA / desired maximum current × 100%
20 mA
[140] Bus ctrl. 4-20 mA 0–100% i . e . 10mA : × 100% = 200%
10 mA

[141] Bus ctrl t.o. 0–100%, (0–20 mA) Example 1:


Variable value=OUTPUT FREQUENCY, range=0-100 Hz
[142] Bus ctrl t.o. 0–100% Range needed for output=0-50 Hz.
4-20mA Output signal 0 mA or 4 mA is needed at 0 Hz (0% of
[143] Ext. CL 1 4-20mA 0–100% range) - set parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to
[144] Ext. CL 2 4-20mA 0–100% 0%.
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 50 Hz (50% of range) -
[145] Ext. CL 3 4-20mA 0–100%
set parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 50%.

NOTICE
130BA858.10

20 mA
Values for setting the minimum reference are found in
open loop parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference and for
closed loop 20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. - values for
maximum reference for open loop are found in
3-03 Maximum Reference and for closed loop 0/4 mA
20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.
0% 50% 100%

6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale


Range: Function:
0Hz 50Hz 100Hz
0 %* [0 - 200 Scale for the minimum output (0 mA or 4 mA)
Illustration 6.14 Example 1
%] of the analog signal at terminal 42.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 91


How to Programme Operating Instructions

Example 2: 14-01 Switching Frequency


Variable=FEEDBACK, range=-200% to +200% Option: Function:
Range needed for output=0-100%.
Select the inverter switching frequency. Changing
Output signal 0 mA or 4 mA is needed at 0% (50% of
the switching frequency can help reduce acoustic
range) - set parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to
noise from the motor.
50%.
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 100% (75% of range) - NOTICE
set parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 75%. The output frequency value of the
frequency converter must never exceed

130BA856.10
20 mA 1/10 of the switching frequency. When the
motor is running, adjust the switching
frequency in parameter 14-01 Switching
Frequency until the motor is as noiseless as
possible. See also 14-00 Switching Pattern
0/4 mA and the section Derating in the relevant
6 6 0% 50% 75% 100% design guide.

[0] 1.0 kHz


[1] 1.5 kHz
-200% 0% +100% +200%
[2] 2.0 kHz
Illustration 6.15 Example 2
[3] 2.5 kHz
[4] 3.0 kHz
[5] 3.5 kHz
Example 3:
[6] 4.0 kHz
Variable value=REFERENCE, range=Minimum ref -
[7] 5.0 kHz
maximum ref.
[8] 6.0 kHz
Range needed for output=Minimum ref (0%) - Maximum
[9] 7.0 kHz
ref (100%), 0-10 mA
Output signal 0 mA or 4 mA is needed at minimum ref - [10] 8.0 kHz
set parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 0%. [11] 10.0 kHz
Output signal 10 mA is needed at maximum ref (100% of [12] 12.0kHz
range) - set parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to [13] 14.0 kHz
200%. [14] 16.0kHz
(20 mA/10 mA x 100%=200%).
20-00 Feedback 1 Source
130BA857.10

Option: Function:
20 mA
Up to 3 different feedback signals
can be used to provide the feedback
signal for the frequency converter’s
10 mA PID controller.
This parameter defines which input
is used as the source of the first
feedback signal.
0/4 mA
0% Analog input X30/11 and analog
100% 200%
input X30/12 refer to inputs on the
optional general purpose I/O board.

[0] No function
Min ref Max ref Max ref X 20/10 [1] Analog Input 53
Illustration 6.16 Example 3 [2] * Analog Input 54
[3] Pulse input 29
[4] Pulse input 33
[7] Analog Input X30/11
[8] Analog Input X30/12
[9] Analog Input X42/1
[10] Analog Input X42/3
[11] Analog Input X42/5

92 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

20-00 Feedback 1 Source 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion


Option: Function: Option: Function:
[15] Analog Input X48/2 See also 20-34 Duct 1 Area [m2] through
[100] Bus Feedback 1 20-37 Duct 2 Area [in2] for setting of duct
[101] Bus Feedback 2 area.
[102] Bus feedback 3
[104] Sensorless Flow Requires set-up by MCT 10 Set-up 20-03 Feedback 2 Source
Software with sensorless-specific Option: Function:
plug-in. See parameter 20-00 Feedback 1
[105] Sensorless Pressure Requires set-up by MCT 10 Set-up Source for details.
Software with sensorless-specific [0] * No function
plug-in. [1] Analog Input 53
[2] Analog Input 54
NOTICE
6 6
[3] Pulse input 29
If a feedback is not used, set its source to [0] No [4] Pulse input 33
Function. Parameter 20-20 Feedback Function determines [7] Analog Input X30/11
how the PID controller uses the 3 possible feedbacks. [8] Analog Input X30/12
[9] Analog Input X42/1
20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion [10] Analog Input X42/3
Option: Function: [11] Analog Input X42/5

This parameter allows a conversion function [15] Analog Input X48/2


to be applied to feedback 1. [100] Bus Feedback 1
[101] Bus Feedback 2
[0] Linear No effect on the feedback.
[102] Bus feedback 3
*
[104] Sensorless Flow
[1] Square root Commonly used when a pressure sensor is
[105] Sensorless Pressure
used to provide flow feedback
( flow ∝ pressure ). 20-04 Feedback 2 Conversion
[2] Pressure to Used in compressor applications to provide Option: Function:
temperature temperature feedback using a pressure sensor. See parameter 20-01 Feedback 1
The temperature of the refrigerant is Conversion for details.
calculated using the following formula:
A2
[0] * Linear
Temperature = − A 3,
ln Pe + 1 − A 1 [1] Square root
where A1, A2 and A3 are refrigerant-specific [2] Pressure to temperature
constants. Select the refrigerant in [3] Pressure to flow
20-30 Refrigerant. Parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1 [4] Velocity to flow
through 20-23 Setpoint 3 allow the values of
A1, A2 and A3 to be entered for a refrigerant 20-06 Feedback 3 Source
that is not listed in 20-30 Refrigerant. Option: Function:
[3] Pressure to Used in applications for controlling the air See parameter 20-00 Feedback 1
flow flow in a duct. A dynamic pressure Source for details.
measurement (pitot tube) represents the
[0] * No function
feedback signal.
[1] Analog Input 53
Flow = Duct Area × Dynamic Pressure
[2] Analog Input 54
× Air Density Factor
See also 20-34 Duct 1 Area [m2] through [3] Pulse input 29
20-38 Air Density Factor [%] for setting of duct [4] Pulse input 33
area and air density. [7] Analog Input X30/11
[8] Analog Input X30/12
[4] Velocity to Used in applications for controlling the air
[9] Analog Input X42/1
flow flow in a duct. An air velocity measurement
[10] Analog Input X42/3
represents the feedback signal.
[11] Analog Input X42/5
Flow = Duct Area × Air Velocity
[15] Analog Input X48/2
[100] Bus Feedback 1
[101] Bus Feedback 2

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 93


How to Programme Operating Instructions

20-06 Feedback 3 Source 20-20 Feedback Function


Option: Function: Option: Function:
[102] Bus feedback 3 NOTICE
[104] Sensorless Flow
Set any unused feedbacks to [0] No
[105] Sensorless Pressure
Function in parameter 20-00 Feedback 1
20-07 Feedback 3 Conversion Source, parameter 20-03 Feedback 2
Source, or parameter 20-06 Feedback 3
Option: Function:
Source. The sum of setpoint 1 and any
See parameter 20-01 Feedback 1 other references that are enabled (see
Conversion for details. parameter group 3-1* References) are used
[0] * Linear as the PID controller’s setpoint reference.
[1] Square root
[2] Pressure to temperature [3] Minimum Sets up the PID controller to compare feedback
[3] Pressure to flow * 1, feedback 2 and feedback 3 and uses the
6 6 [4] Velocity to flow lowest value as the feedback.

20-20 Feedback Function NOTICE


Option: Function: Set any unused feedbacks to [0] No
This parameter determines how the 3 possible Function in parameter 20-00 Feedback 1
feedbacks are used to control the output Source, parameter 20-03 Feedback 2
frequency of the frequency converter. Source, or parameter 20-06 Feedback 3
Source. Only setpoint 1 is used. The sum
[0] Sum Sets up the PID controller to use the sum of of setpoint 1 and any other references
feedback 1, feedback 2 and feedback 3 as the that are enabled (see parameter group
feedback. 3-1* References) are used as the PID
NOTICE controller’s setpoint reference.

Set any unused feedbacks to [0] No


[4] Maximum Sets up the PID controller to compare feedback
Function in parameter 20-00 Feedback 1
1, feedback 2 and feedback 3 and use the
Source, parameter 20-03 Feedback 2
highest value as the feedback.
Source, or parameter 20-06 Feedback 3
Source. NOTICE
Set any unused feedbacks to [0] No
The sum of setpoint 1 and any other references
Function in parameter 20-00 Feedback 1
that are enabled (see parameter group 3-1*
Source, parameter 20-03 Feedback 2
References) are used as the PID controller’s
Source, or parameter 20-06 Feedback 3
setpoint reference.
Source.
[1] Difference Sets up the PID controller to use the difference
between feedback 1 and feedback 2 as the Only setpoint 1 is used. The sum of setpoint 1
feedback. Feedback 3 is not used with this and any other references that are enabled (see
selection. Only setpoint 1 is used. The sum of parameter group 3-1* References) are used as the
setpoint 1 and any other references that are PID controller’s setpoint reference.
enabled (see parameter group 3-1* References) are
[5] Multi Sets up the PID controller to calculate the
used as the PID controller’s setpoint reference.
Setpoint difference between feedback 1 and setpoint 1,
[2] Average Sets up the PID Controller to use the average of Min feedback 2 and setpoint 2, and feedback 3 and
feedback 1, feedback 2 and feedback 3 as the setpoint 3. It uses the feedback/setpoint pair in
feedback. which the feedback is the farthest below its
corresponding setpoint reference. If all feedback
signals are above their corresponding setpoints,
the PID controller uses the feedback/setpoint
pair with the least difference between the 2.

94 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

20-20 Feedback Function NOTICE


Option: Function: Set any unused feedback to [0] No function in
NOTICE Parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or
If only 2 feedback signals are used, set
parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source.
the non-used feedback to [0] No Function
in parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or The PID controller uses the feedback resulting from the
parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Note function selected in parameter 20-20 Feedback Function to
that each setpoint reference is the sum of control the output frequency of the frequency converter.
its respective parameter value This feedback can also:
(parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1,
parameter 20-22 Setpoint 2 and • Be shown on the frequency converter’s display.
20-23 Setpoint 3) and any other references • Be used to control a frequency converter's analog
that are enabled (see parameter group output.
3-1* References).
• Be transmitted over various serial communication 6 6
protocols.
[6] Multi Sets up the PID controller to calculate the
Setpoint difference between feedback 1 and setpoint 1, The frequency converter can be configured to handle
Max feedback 2 and setpoint 2, and feedback 3 and multi-zone applications. 2 different multi-zone applications
setpoint 3. It uses the feedback/setpoint pair in are supported:
which the feedback is farthest above its
corresponding setpoint reference. If all feedback • Multi-zone, single setpoint
signals are below their corresponding setpoints,
the PID controller uses the feedback/setpoint
• Multi-zone, multi-setpoint

pair with the least difference between the 2. Examples 1 and 2 illustrate the difference between the 2:

NOTICE Example 1 – Multi-zone, single setpoint


If only 2 feedback signals are used, set In an office building, a VAV (variable air volume) VLT®
the non-used feedback to [0] No Function HVAC Drive system must ensure a minimum pressure at
in parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source, selected VAV boxes. Due to the varying pressure losses in
parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or each duct, the pressure at each VAV box cannot be
parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Note assumed to be the same. The minimum pressure required
that each setpoint reference is the sum of is the same for all VAV boxes. This control method can be
its respective parameter value set up by setting parameter 20-20 Feedback Function to [3]
(parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1, Minimum, and entering the desired pressure in
parameter 20-22 Setpoint 2 and parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1. If any feedback is below the
20-23 Setpoint 3) and any other references setpoint, the PID controller increases the fan speed. If all
that are enabled (see parameter group feedbacks are above the setpoint, the PID controller
3-1* References). decreases the fan speed.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 95


How to Programme Operating Instructions

130BA353.10
P
Zone 1
Damper
Supply VAV
air fan Box

P
Zone 2

VAV
Cooling/ Box
heating coil
Damper
P
Zone 3

6 6 Damper VAV
Return air fan Box

Illustration 6.17 Example, Multi-zone, Single Setpoint

Example 2 – Multi-zone, multi-setpoint 20-22 Setpoint 2


The previous example illustrates the use of multi-zone, Range: Function:
multi-setpoint control. If the zones require different
0 [-999999.999 - Setpoint 2 is used in closed-
pressures for each VAV box, each setpoint may be
ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999 loop mode to enter a
specified in parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1,
ProcessCtrlUnit] setpoint reference that may
parameter 20-22 Setpoint 2 and 20-23 Setpoint 3. By
be used by the frequency
selecting [5] Multi-setpoint minimum in
converter’s PID controller. See
parameter 20-20 Feedback Function, the PID controller
the description of
increases the fan speed if any one of the feedbacks is
parameter 20-20 Feedback
below its setpoint. If all feedbacks are above their
Function.
individual setpoints, the PID controller decreases the fan
speed. NOTICE
20-21 Setpoint 1 The setpoint reference
entered here is added to
Range: Function:
any other references that
0 [-999999.999 - Setpoint 1 is used in closed-
are enabled (see
ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999 loop mode to enter a
parameter group 3-1*
ProcessCtrlUnit] setpoint reference that is
References).
used by the frequency
converter’s PID controller. See
the description of
parameter 20-20 Feedback
Function.

NOTICE
The setpoint reference
entered here is added to
any other references that
are enabled (see
parameter group 3-1*
References).

96 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control 20-94 PID Integral Time


Option: Function: Range: Function:
[0] * Normal The frequency converter’s output frequency Proportional Gain. When no deviation is present,
decreases when the feedback is greater than the the output from the proportional controller is 0.
setpoint reference. This behaviour is common for
pressure-controlled supply fan and pump 22-21 Low Power Detection
applications. Option: Function:
[1] Inverse The frequency converter’s output frequency [0] * Disabled
increases when the feedback is greater than the [1] Enabled Carry out the low-power detection commis-
setpoint reference. This behaviour is common for sioning to set the parameters in parameter group
temperature-controlled cooling applications, such 22-3* No-Flow Power Tuning for proper operation.
as cooling towers.
22-22 Low Speed Detection
20-93 PID Proportional Gain Option: Function:
Range: Function: [0] * Disabled 6 6
0.50* [0 - 10 ] NOTICE [1] Enabled Detects when the motor operates with a speed
as set in parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
Always set the desired value for
[RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit
20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. before
[Hz].
setting the values for the PID controller
in parameter group 20-9* PID Controller.
22-23 No-Flow Function
Common actions for low-power detection and low-speed
The proportional gain indicates the number of
detection (individual selections not possible).
times the error between the setpoint and the
feedback signal is to be applied. Option: Function:
[0] * Off
If (Error x Gain) jumps with a value equal to what is set in [1] Sleep Mode The frequency converter enters sleep mode
20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb., the PID controller tries to and stops when a no-flow condition is
change the output speed equal to what is set in detected. See parameter group 22-4* Sleep
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]/ Mode for programming options for sleep
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]. However, the mode.
output speed is limited by this setting.
[2] Warning The frequency converter continues to run, but
The proportional band (error causing output to change
activates a no-flow warning [W92]. A digital
from 0-100%) can be calculated with the formula:
output or a serial communication bus can
communicate a warning to other equipment.
1
× Max Reference
Proportional Gain
[3] Alarm The frequency converter stops running and
20-94 PID Integral Time activates a no-flow alarm [A 92]. A frequency
Range: Function: converter digital output or a serial communi-
20 [0.01 - The integrator accumulates a contribution to cation bus can communicate an alarm to
s* 10000 s] the output from the PID controller as long as other equipment.
there is a deviation between the reference/
setpoint and feedback signals. The contribution NOTICE
is proportional to the size of the deviation. This Do not set 14-20 Reset Mode, to [13] Infinite auto reset,
ensures that the deviation (error) approaches when parameter 22-23 No-Flow Function is set to [3]
zero. Alarm. Doing so causes the frequency converter to
Quick response on any deviation is obtained continuously cycle between running and stopping when
when the integral time is set to a low value. a no-flow condition is detected.
Setting it too low, however, may cause the
control to become unstable.
The value set is the time needed for the
integrator to add the same contribution as the
proportional for a certain deviation.
If the value is set to 10000, the controller acts
as a pure proportional controller with a P-band
based on the value set in parameter 20-93 PID

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 97


How to Programme Operating Instructions

NOTICE NOTICE
Disable the automatic bypass function of the bypass if: For frequency converters with constant-speed
• The frequency converter is equipped with a bypass
constant-speed bypass with an automatic If an automatic bypass function starts the bypass at
bypass function starting the bypass if the persistent alarm conditions, disable the bypass’s
frequency converter experiences a persistent automatic bypass function, if [2] Alarm or [3] Man. Reset
alarm condition, and Alarm is selected as the dry-pump function.

• [3] Alarm is selected as the no-flow function.


22-40 Minimum Run Time
Range: Function:
22-24 No-Flow Delay
10 s* [0 - 600 s] Set the desired minimum running time for
Range: Function: the motor after a start command (digital
10 s* [1 - 600 s] Set the time that low power/low speed must input or bus) before entering sleep mode.
stay detected to activate signal for actions. If
6 6 detection disappears before the timer runs 22-41 Minimum Sleep Time
out, the timer is reset.
Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - 600 s] Set the desired minimum time for staying in
22-26 Dry Pump Function
sleep mode. This setting overrides any wake-
Select desired action for dry pump operation.
up conditions.
Option: Function:
[0] * Off 22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM]
[1] Warning The frequency converter continues to run, Range: Function:
but activates a dry pump warning [W93]. A Size [ par. To be used if 0-02 Motor Speed Unit has
frequency converter digital output or a serial related* 4-11 - been set for RPM (parameter not visible if
communication bus can communicate a par. 4-13 Hz is selected). Only to be used if
warning to other equipment. RPM] parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set for
[2] Alarm The frequency converter stops running and open loop and an external controller
activates a dry pump alarm [A93]. A applies speed reference.
frequency converter digital output or a serial Set the reference speed at which the sleep
communication bus can communicate an mode should be cancelled.
alarm to other equipment.
22-60 Broken Belt Function
[3] Man. Reset The frequency converter stops running and
Alarm activates a dry pump alarm [A93]. A Selects the action to be performed if the broken-belt condition is
frequency converter digital output or a serial detected
communication bus can communicate an Option: Function:
alarm to other equipment. [0] * Off
[1] Warning The frequency converter continues to run, but
NOTICE activates a broken-belt warning [W95]. A
To use dry pump detection: frequency converter digital output or a serial
communication bus can communicate a warning
1. Enable low-power detection in
to other equipment.
parameter 22-21 Low Power Detection.
[2] Trip The frequency converter stops running and
2. Commission low-power detection using either
activates a broken-belt alarm [A 95]. A frequency
parameter group 22-3* No-flow Power Tuning No
converter digital output or a serial communi-
Flow Power Tuning, or 22-20 Low Power Auto Set-
cation bus can communicate an alarm to other
up.
equipment.

NOTICE NOTICE
Do not set 14-20 Reset Mode to [13] Infinite auto reset, Do not set 14-20 Reset Mode, to [13] Infinite auto reset,
when parameter 22-26 Dry Pump Function is set to [2] when parameter 22-60 Broken Belt Function is set to [2]
Alarm. Doing so causes the frequency converter to Trip. Doing so causes the frequency converter to contin-
continuously cycle between running and stopping when uously cycle between running and stopping when a
a dry pump condition is detected. broken-belt condition is detected.

98 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

NOTICE 6.1.5 Main Menu Mode


For frequency converters with constant-speed
Both the GLCP and NLCP provide access to the Main Menu
bypass mode. Select the Main Menu mode by pressing [Main
If an automatic bypass function starts the bypass at Menu]. Illustration 6.18 shows the resulting readout, which
persistent alarm conditions, disable the bypass’s appears on the display of the GLCP.
automatic bypass function, if [2] Alarm or [3] Man. Reset Lines 2 to 5 on the display show a list of parameter groups
Alarm is selected as the dry-pump function.
which can be selected by toggling [▲] and [▼].

22-61 Broken Belt Torque

130BP066.10
1107 RPM 3.84 A 1 (1)
Range: Function:
Main menu
10 %* [0 - 100 %] Sets the broken belt torque as a percentage
0 - ** Operation/Display
of the rated motor torque.
1 - ** Load/Motor

6 6
22-62 Broken Belt Delay 2 - ** Brakes
3 - ** Reference / Ramps
Range: Function:
10 s [0 - 600 Sets the time for which the broken-belt
Illustration 6.18 Display Example
s] conditions must be active before carrying out
the action selected in parameter 22-60 Broken
Belt Function.
Each parameter has a name and a number, which remain
22-75 Short Cycle Protection the same regardless of the programming mode. In the
Main Menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups.
Option: Function:
The first digit of the parameter number (from the left)
[0] * Disabled Timer set in parameter 22-76 Interval between indicates the parameter group number.
Starts is disabled.

[1] Enabled Timer set in parameter 22-76 Interval between All parameters can be changed in the Main Menu. The
Starts is enabled. configuration of the unit (parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode) determines other parameters available for
22-76 Interval between Starts programming. For example, selecting closed loop enables
Range: Function: more parameters related to closed-loop operation. Option
Size [ par. 22-77 Sets the time desired as minimum cards added to the unit enable more parameters
related* - 3600 s] time between 2 starts. Any normal associated with the option device.
start command (start/jog/freeze) is
disregarded until the timer has 6.1.6 Parameter Selection
expired.
In the Main Menu mode, the parameters are divided into
22-77 Minimum Run Time groups. Press the navigation keys to select a parameter
Range: Function: group.
The following parameter groups are accessible:
0 s* [ 0 - par. NOTICE
22-76 s]
Does not work in cascade mode.
Group no. Parameter group
0-** Operation/Display
Sets the time desired as minimum run time
1-** Load/Motor
after a normal start command (start/jog/freeze).
2-** Brakes
Any normal stop command is disregarded until
3-** References/Ramps
the set time has expired. The timer starts
4-** Limits/Warnings
counting following a normal start command
5-** Digital In/Out
(start/jog/freeze).
6-** Analog In/Out
A coast (inverse) or an external interlock
8-** Comm. and Options
command overrides the timer.
9-** Profibus
10-** CAN Fieldbus
11-** LonWorks
12-** Ethernet
13-** Smart Logic

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 99


How to Programme Operating Instructions

Group no. Parameter group 6.1.8 Changing a Text Value


14-** Special Functions
15-** FC Information If the selected parameter is a text value, change the text
16-** Data Readouts value with the [▲]/[▼] keys.
18-** Data Readouts 2 [▲] increases the value, and [▼] decreases the value. Place
20-** FC Closed Loop the cursor on the value to be saved and press [OK].
21-** Ext. Closed Loop
22-** Application Functions

130BP068.10
740RPM 10.64 A 1 [1]
23-** Time Actions Basic Settings 0-0*
24-** Appl. Functions 2
0 -01 Language
25-** Cascade Controller
26-** Analog I/O Option MCB 109
30-** Special Features [0] English
31-** Bypass Option

6 6 35-** Sensor Input Option Illustration 6.20 Display Example

Table 6.7 Parameter Groups

After selecting a parameter group, select a parameter with


6.1.9 Changing a Group of Numeric Data
the navigation keys.
Values
The middle section on the GLCP display shows the
parameter number and name as well as the selected If the selected parameter represents a numeric data value,
parameter value. change the selected data value with the [◄] and [►] keys
as well as the up/down [▲] [▼] keys. Press [◄] and [►] to
move the cursor horizontally.
130BP067.10

740RPM 10.64A 1 [1]


Basic Settings 0-0*

130BP069.10
0 -01 Language 113 RPM 1.78 A 1(1)
Load depen. setting 1- 6*

[0] English 1 - 60 Low speed load


compensation
100%
Illustration 6.19 Display Example

Illustration 6.21 Display Example


6.1.7 Changing Data

1. Press [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu].


Press [▲] and [▼] to change the data value. [▲] increases
2. Press [▲] and [▼] to find the parameter group to the data value, and [▼] decreases the data value. Place the
edit. cursor on the value to be saved and press [OK].
3. Press [OK].
130BP070.10

729RPM 6.21A 1(1)


4. Press [▲] and [▼] to find the parameter to edit. Load depen. setting 1- 6*

5. Press [OK]. 1 - 60 Low speed load


compensation
6. Press [▲] and [▼] to select correct parameter
16 0%
setting. Or, to move to digits within a number,
press keys. cursor indicates digit selected to
change. [▲] increases the value, [▼] decreases the Illustration 6.22 Display Example
value.
7. Press [Cancel] to disregard change, or press [OK]
to accept change and enter new setting.

100 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


How to Programme Operating Instructions

6.1.10 Changing of Data Value, Step by


Step

Certain parameters can be changed step by step or


infinitely variably. This applies to parameter 1-20 Motor
Power [kW], parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage and
parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric
data values and as numeric data values infinitely variably.

6.1.11 Readout and Programming of


Indexed Parameters

Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.


15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code to 15-32 Alarm Log: Time
contain a fault log which can be read out. Select a 6 6
parameter, press [OK], and use [▲] and [▼] to scroll
through the value log.

Use parameter 3-10 Preset Reference as another example:


Select the parameter, press [OK], and use [▲] and [▼] to
scroll through the indexed values. To change the
parameter value, select the indexed value and press [OK].
Change the value by [▲] and [▼]. Press [OK] to accept the
new setting. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press [Back] to leave
the parameter.

6.2 Parameter Menu Structure

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 101


6 6
0-** Operation/Display 1-03 Torque Characteristics 1-93 Thermistor Source 4-19 Max Output Frequency 5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6

102
0-0* Basic Settings 1-06 Clockwise Direction 2-** Brakes 4-5* Adj. Warnings 5-8* I/O Options
0-01 Language 1-1* Motor Selection 2-0* DC Brake 4-50 Warning Current Low 5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay
0-02 Motor Speed Unit 1-10 Motor Construction 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current 4-51 Warning Current High 5-9* Bus Controlled
0-03 Regional Settings 1-1* VVC+ PM 2-01 DC Brake Current 4-52 Warning Speed Low 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control
0-04 Operating State at Power-up 1-14 Damping Gain 2-02 DC Braking Time 4-53 Warning Speed High 5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
0-05 Local Mode Unit 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const. 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] 4-54 Warning Reference Low 5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset
0-1* Set-up Operations 1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] 4-55 Warning Reference High 5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
0-10 Active Set-up 1-17 Voltage filter time const. 2-06 Parking Current 4-56 Warning Feedback Low 5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset
How to Programme

0-11 Programming Set-up 1-2* Motor Data 2-07 Parking Time 4-57 Warning Feedback High 5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
0-12 This Set-up Linked to 1-20 Motor Power [kW] 2-1* Brake Energy Funct. 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function 5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 1-21 Motor Power [hp] 2-10 Brake Function 4-6* Speed Bypass 6-** Analog In/Out
0-14 Readout: Prog. Set-ups/Channel 1-22 Motor Voltage 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) 4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] 6-0* Analog I/O Mode
0-2* LCP Display 1-23 Motor Frequency 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) 4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1-24 Motor Current 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring 4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed 2-15 Brake Check 4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] 6-02 Fire Mode Live Zero Timeout Function
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque 2-16 AC brake Max. Current 4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up 6-1* Analog Input 53
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1-28 Motor Rotation Check 2-17 Over-voltage Control 5-** Digital In/Out 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) 3-** Reference/Ramps 5-0* Digital I/O mode 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
0-25 My Personal Menu 1-3* Adv. Motor Data 3-0* Reference Limits 5-00 Digital I/O mode 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
0-3* LCP Custom Readout 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) 3-02 Minimum Reference 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode 6-13 Terminal 53 High Current
0-30 Custom Readout Unit 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) 3-03 Maximum Reference 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0-31 Custom Readout Min Value 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) 3-04 Reference Function 5-1* Digital Inputs 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
0-32 Custom Readout Max Value 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) 3-1* References 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input 6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant
0-37 Display Text 1 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) 3-10 Preset Reference 5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input 6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero
0-38 Display Text 2 1-39 Motor Poles 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input 6-2* Analog Input 54
0-39 Display Text 3 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM 3-13 Reference Site 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage
0-4* LCP Keypad 1-46 Position Detection Gain 3-14 Preset Relative Reference 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP 1-5* Load Indep. Setting 3-15 Reference 1 Source 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed 3-16 Reference 2 Source 5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input 6-23 Terminal 54 High Current
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP 1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] 3-17 Reference 3 Source 5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP 1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz] 3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] 5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Operating Instructions

0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP 1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current 3-4* Ramp 1 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop 6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP 1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time 5-3* Digital Outputs 6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero
0-5* Copy/Save 1-6* Load Depen. Setting 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time 5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output 6-3* Analog Input X30/11
0-50 LCP Copy 1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 3-5* Ramp 2 5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output 6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage
0-51 Set-up Copy 1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) 6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage

Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved.


0-6* Password 1-62 Slip Compensation 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) 6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0-60 Main Menu Password 1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant 3-8* Other Ramps 5-4* Relays 6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password 1-64 Resonance Dampening 3-80 Jog Ramp Time 5-40 Function Relay 6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant
0-65 Personal Menu Password 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time 5-41 On Delay, Relay 6-37 Term. X30/11 Live Zero
0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed 3-82 Starting Ramp Up Time 5-42 Off Delay, Relay 6-4* Analog Input X30/12
Password 1-7* Start Adjustments 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter 5-5* Pulse Input 6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage
0-67 Bus Access Password 1-70 PM Start Mode 3-90 Step Size 5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage
0-7* Clock Settings 1-71 Start Delay 3-91 Ramp Time 5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0-70 Date and Time 1-72 Start Function 3-92 Power Restore 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value
0-71 Date Format 1-73 Flying Start 3-93 Maximum Limit 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value 6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant
0-72 Time Format 1-77 Compressor Start Max Speed [RPM] 3-94 Minimum Limit 5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 6-47 Term. X30/12 Live Zero
0-74 DST/Summertime 1-78 Compressor Start Max Speed [Hz] 3-95 Ramp Delay 5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 6-5* Analog Output 42
0-76 DST/Summertime Start 1-79 Compressor Start Max Time to Trip 4-** Limits/Warnings 5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 6-50 Terminal 42 Output
0-77 DST/Summertime End 1-8* Stop Adjustments 4-1* Motor Limits 5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale
0-79 Clock Fault 1-80 Function at Stop 4-10 Motor Speed Direction 5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale
0-81 Working Days 1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM] 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] 5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
0-82 Additional Working Days 1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] 5-6* Pulse Output 6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset
0-83 Additional Non-Working Days 1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable 6-55 Analog Output Filter
0-89 Date and Time Readout 1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz] 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] 5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 6-6* Analog Output X30/8
1-** Load and Motor 1-9* Motor Temperature 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable 6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output
1-0* General Settings 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale
1-00 Configuration Mode 1-91 Motor External Fan 4-18 Current Limit 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale

MG11F502
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control 9-15 PCD Write Configuration 12-2* Process Data 14-01 Switching Frequency 15-23 Historic log: Date and Time
6-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset 9-16 PCD Read Configuration 12-20 Control Instance 14-03 Overmodulation 15-3* Alarm Log
8-** Comm. and Options 9-18 Node Address 12-21 Process Data Config Write 14-04 PWM Random 15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code
8-0* General Settings 9-22 Telegram Selection 12-22 Process Data Config Read 14-1* Mains On/Off 15-31 Alarm Log: Value

MG11F502
8-01 Control Site 9-23 Parameters for Signals 12-27 Primary Master 14-10 Mains Failure 15-32 Alarm Log: Time
8-02 Control Source 9-27 Parameter Edit 12-28 Store Data Values 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault 15-33 Alarm Log: Date and Time
8-03 Control Timeout Time 9-28 Process Control 12-29 Store Always 14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance 15-4* Drive Identification
8-04 Control Timeout Function 9-44 Fault Message Counter 12-3* Ethernet/IP 14-2* Reset Functions 15-40 FC Type
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function 9-45 Fault Code 12-30 Warning Parameter 14-20 Reset Mode 15-41 Power Section
How to Programme

8-06 Reset Control Timeout 9-47 Fault Number 12-31 Net Reference 14-21 Automatic Restart Time 15-42 Voltage
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger 9-52 Fault Situation Counter 12-32 Net Control 14-22 Operation Mode 15-43 Software Version
8-08 Readout Filtering 9-53 Profibus Warning Word 12-33 CIP Revision 14-23 Typecode Setting 15-44 Ordered Typecode String
8-09 Communication Charset 9-63 Actual Baud Rate 12-34 CIP Product Code 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 15-45 Actual Typecode String
8-1* Control Settings 9-64 Device Identification 12-35 EDS Parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault 15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No
8-10 Control Profile 9-65 Profile Number 12-37 COS Inhibit Timer 14-28 Production Settings 15-47 Power Card Ordering No
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW 9-67 Control Word 1 12-38 COS Filter 14-29 Service Code 15-48 LCP D No
8-3* FC Port Settings 9-68 Status Word 1 12-4* Modbus TCP 14-3* Current Limit Ctrl. 15-49 SW ID Control Card
8-30 Protocol 9-71 Profibus Save Data Values 12-40 Status Parameter 14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain 15-50 SW ID Power Card
8-31 Address 9-72 ProfibusDriveReset 12-41 Slave Message Count 14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time 15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number
8-32 Baud Rate 9-75 DO Identification 12-42 Slave Exception Message Count 14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time 15-53 Power Card Serial Number
8-33 Parity/Stop Bits 9-80 Defined Parameters (1) 12-8* Other Ethernet Services 14-4* Energy Optimising 15-55 Vendor URL
8-34 Estimated cycle time 9-81 Defined Parameters (2) 12-80 FTP Server 14-40 VT Level 15-56 Vendor Name
8-35 Minimum Response Delay 9-82 Defined Parameters (3) 12-81 HTTP Server 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation 15-59 CSIV Filename
8-36 Maximum Response Delay 9-83 Defined Parameters (4) 12-82 SMTP Service 14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency 15-6* Option Ident
8-37 Maximum Inter-Char Delay 9-84 Defined Parameters (5) 12-89 Transparent Socket Channel Port 14-43 Motor Cosphi 15-60 Option Mounted
8-4* FC MC protocol set 9-90 Changed Parameters (1) 12-9* Advanced Ethernet Services 14-5* Environment 15-61 Option SW Version
8-40 Telegram Selection 9-91 Changed Parameters (2) 12-90 Cable Diagnostic 14-50 RFI Filter 15-62 Option Ordering No
8-42 PCD Write Configuration 9-92 Changed Parameters (3) 12-91 Auto Crossover 14-51 DC Link Compensation 15-63 Option Serial No
8-43 PCD Read Configuration 9-93 Changed Parameters (4) 12-92 IGMP Snooping 14-52 Fan Control 15-70 Option in Slot A
8-5* Digital/Bus 9-94 Changed Parameters (5) 12-93 Cable Error Length 14-53 Fan Monitor 15-71 Slot A Option SW Version
8-50 Coasting Select 9-99 Profibus Revision Counter 12-94 Broadcast Storm Protection 14-55 Output Filter 15-72 Option in Slot B
8-52 DC Brake Select 11-** LonWorks 12-95 Broadcast Storm Filter 14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units 15-73 Slot B Option SW Version
Operating Instructions

8-53 Start Select 11-0* LonWorks ID 12-96 Port Config 14-6* Auto Derate 15-8* Operating Data II
8-54 Reversing Select 11-00 Neuron ID 12-98 Interface Counters 14-60 Function at Overtemperature 15-80 Fan Running Hours
8-55 Set-up Select 11-1* LON Functions 12-99 Media Counters 14-61 Function at Inverter Overload 15-81 Preset Fan Running Hours
8-56 Preset Reference Select 11-10 Drive Profile 13-** Smart Logic 14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current 15-9* Parameter Info
8-7* BACnet 11-15 LON Warning Word 13-0* SLC Settings 14-9* Fault Settings 15-92 Defined Parameters
8-70 BACnet Device Instance 11-17 XIF Revision 13-00 SL Controller Mode 14-90 Fault Level 15-93 Modified Parameters
8-72 MS/TP Max Masters 11-18 LonWorks Revision 13-01 Start Event 15-** Drive Information 15-98 Drive Identification
8-73 MS/TP Max Info Frames 11-2* LON Param. Access 13-02 Stop Event 15-0* Operating Data 15-99 Parameter Metadata

Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved.


8-74 "I-Am" Service 11-21 Store Data Values 13-03 Reset SLC 15-00 Operating Hours 16-** Data Readouts
8-75 Initialisation Password 12-** Ethernet 13-1* Comparators 15-01 Running Hours 16-0* General Status
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics 12-0* IP Settings 13-10 Comparator Operand 15-02 kWh Counter 16-00 Control Word
8-80 Bus Message Count 12-00 IP Address Assignment 13-11 Comparator Operator 15-03 Power Up's 16-01 Reference [Unit]
8-81 Bus Error Count 12-01 IP Address 13-12 Comparator Value 15-04 Over Temp's 16-02 Reference [%]
8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd 12-02 Subnet Mask 13-2* Timers 15-05 Over Volt's 16-03 Status Word
8-83 Slave Error Count 12-03 Default Gateway 13-20 SL Controller Timer 15-06 Reset kWh Counter 16-05 Main Actual Value [%]
8-84 Slave Messages Sent 12-04 DHCP Server 13-4* Logic Rules 15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter 16-09 Custom Readout
8-85 Slave Timeout Errors 12-05 Lease Expires 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 15-08 Number of Starts 16-1* Motor Status
8-89 Diagnostics Count 12-06 Name Servers 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 15-1* Data Log Settings 16-10 Power [kW]
8-9* Bus Jog/Feedback 12-07 Domain Name 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 15-10 Logging Source 16-11 Power [hp]
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 12-08 Host Name 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 15-11 Logging Interval 16-12 Motor Voltage
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed 12-09 Physical Address 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 15-12 Trigger Event 16-13 Frequency
8-94 Bus Feedback 1 12-1* Ethernet Link Parameters 13-5* States 15-13 Logging Mode 16-14 Motor current
8-95 Bus Feedback 2 12-10 Link Status 13-51 SL Controller Event 15-14 Samples Before Trigger 16-15 Frequency [%]
8-96 Bus Feedback 3 12-11 Link Duration 13-52 SL Controller Action 15-2* Historic Log 16-16 Torque [Nm]
9-** Profibus 12-12 Auto Negotiation 14-** Special Functions 15-20 Historic Log: Event 16-17 Speed [RPM]
9-00 Setpoint 12-13 Link Speed 14-0* Inverter Switching 15-21 Historic Log: Value 16-18 Motor Thermal
9-07 Actual Value 12-14 Link Duplex 14-00 Switching Pattern 15-22 Historic Log: Time 16-20 Motor Angle

103
6 6
6 6
16-22 Torque [%] 18-00 Maintenance Log: Item 20-79 PID Autotuning 21-57 Ext. 3 Reference [Unit] 22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]

104
16-26 Power Filtered [kW] 18-01 Maintenance Log: Action 20-8* PID Basic Settings 21-58 Ext. 3 Feedback [Unit] 22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz]
16-27 Power Filtered [hp] 18-02 Maintenance Log: Time 20-81 PID Normal/Inverse Control 21-59 Ext. 3 Output [%] 22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed
16-3* Drive Status 18-03 Maintenance Log: Date and Time 20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM] 21-6* Ext. CL 3 PID 22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed
16-30 DC Link Voltage 18-1* Fire Mode Log 20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz] 21-60 Ext. 3 Normal/Inverse Control 22-89 Flow at Design Point
16-32 Brake Energy /s 18-10 Fire Mode Log: Event 20-84 On Reference Bandwidth 21-61 Ext. 3 Proportional Gain 22-90 Flow at Rated Speed
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min 18-11 Fire Mode Log: Time 20-9* PID Controller 21-62 Ext. 3 Integral Time 23-** Time-based Functions
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 18-12 Fire Mode Log: Date and Time 20-91 PID Anti Windup 21-63 Ext. 3 Differentation Time 23-0* Timed Actions
16-35 Inverter Thermal 18-3* Inputs & Outputs 20-93 PID Proportional Gain 21-64 Ext. 3 Dif. Gain Limit 23-00 ON Time
How to Programme

16-36 Inv. Nom. Current 18-30 Analog Input X42/1 20-94 PID Integral Time 22-** Appl. Functions 23-01 ON Action
16-37 Inv. Max. Current 18-31 Analog Input X42/3 20-95 PID Differentiation Time 22-0* Miscellaneous 23-02 OFF Time
16-38 SL Controller State 18-32 Analog Input X42/5 20-96 PID Diff. Gain Limit 22-00 External Interlock Delay 23-03 OFF Action
16-39 Control Card Temp. 18-33 Analog Out X42/7 [V] 21-** Ext. Closed Loop 22-01 Power Filter Time 23-04 Occurrence
16-40 Logging Buffer Full 18-34 Analog Out X42/9 [V] 21-0* Ext. CL Autotuning 22-2* No-Flow Detection 23-0* Timed Actions Settings
16-41 Logging Buffer Full 18-35 Analog Out X42/11 [V] 21-00 Closed Loop Type 22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up 23-08 Timed Actions Mode
16-43 Timed Actions Status 18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA] 21-01 PID Performance 22-21 Low Power Detection 23-09 Timed Actions Reactivation
16-49 Current Fault Source 18-37 Temp. Input X48/4 21-02 PID Output Change 22-22 Low Speed Detection 23-1* Maintenance
16-5* Ref. & Feedb. 18-38 Temp. Input X48/7 21-03 Minimum Feedback Level 22-23 No-Flow Function 23-10 Maintenance Item
16-50 External Reference 18-39 Temp. Input X48/10 21-04 Maximum Feedback Level 22-24 No-Flow Delay 23-11 Maintenance Action
16-52 Feedback [Unit] 18-5* Ref. & Feedb. 21-09 PID Autotuning 22-26 Dry Pump Function 23-12 Maintenance Time Base
16-53 Digi Pot Reference 18-50 Sensorless Readout [unit] 21-1* Ext. CL 1 Ref./Fb. 22-27 Dry Pump Delay 23-13 Maintenance Time Interval
16-54 Feedback 1 [Unit] 20-** Drive Closed Loop 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit 22-3* No-Flow Power Tuning 23-14 Maintenance Date and Time
16-55 Feedback 2 [Unit] 20-0* Feedback 21-11 Ext. 1 Minimum Reference 22-30 No-Flow Power 23-1* Maintenance Reset
16-56 Feedback 3 [Unit] 20-00 Feedback 1 Source 21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference 22-31 Power Correction Factor 23-15 Reset Maintenance Word
16-58 PID Output [%] 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion 21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source 22-32 Low Speed [RPM] 23-16 Maintenance Text
16-6* Inputs & Outputs 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit 21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source 22-33 Low Speed [Hz] 23-5* Energy Log
16-60 Digital Input 20-03 Feedback 2 Source 21-15 Ext. 1 Setpoint 22-34 Low Speed Power [kW] 23-50 Energy Log Resolution
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting 20-04 Feedback 2 Conversion 21-17 Ext. 1 Reference [Unit] 22-35 Low Speed Power [hp] 23-51 Period Start
16-62 Analog Input 53 20-05 Feedback 2 Source Unit 21-18 Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit] 22-36 High Speed [RPM] 23-53 Energy Log
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting 20-06 Feedback 3 Source 21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%] 22-37 High Speed [Hz] 23-54 Reset Energy Log
16-64 Analog Input 54 20-07 Feedback 3 Conversion 21-2* Ext. CL 1 PID 22-38 High Speed Power [kW] 23-6* Trending
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 20-08 Feedback 3 Source Unit 21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control 22-39 High Speed Power [hp] 23-60 Trend Variable
Operating Instructions

16-66 Digital Output [bin] 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit 21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain 22-4* Sleep Mode 23-61 Continuous Bin Data
16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz] 20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. 21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time 22-40 Minimum Run Time 23-62 Timed Bin Data
16-68 Pulse Input #33 [Hz] 20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. 21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time 22-41 Minimum Sleep Time 23-63 Timed Period Start
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] 20-2* Feedback/Setpoint 21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit 22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM] 23-64 Timed Period Stop
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] 20-20 Feedback Function 21-3* Ext. CL 2 Ref./Fb. 22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz] 23-65 Minimum Bin Value

Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved.


16-71 Relay Output [bin] 20-21 Setpoint 1 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit 22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference 23-66 Reset Continuous Bin Data
16-72 Counter A 20-22 Setpoint 2 21-31 Ext. 2 Minimum Reference 22-45 Setpoint Boost 23-67 Reset Timed Bin Data
16-73 Counter B 20-23 Setpoint 3 21-32 Ext. 2 Maximum Reference 22-46 Maximum Boost Time 23-8* Payback Counter
16-75 Analog In X30/11 20-3* Feedb. Adv. Conv. 21-33 Ext. 2 Reference Source 22-5* End of Curve 23-80 Power Reference Factor
16-76 Analog In X30/12 20-30 Refrigerant 21-34 Ext. 2 Feedback Source 22-50 End of Curve Function 23-81 Energy Cost
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA] 20-31 User-defined Refrigerant A1 21-35 Ext. 2 Setpoint 22-51 End of Curve Delay 23-82 Investment
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port 20-32 User-defined Refrigerant A2 21-37 Ext. 2 Reference [Unit] 22-6* Broken Belt Detection 23-83 Energy Savings
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 20-33 User-defined Refrigerant A3 21-38 Ext. 2 Feedback [Unit] 22-60 Broken Belt Function 23-84 Cost Savings
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 20-34 Duct 1 Area [m2] 21-39 Ext. 2 Output [%] 22-61 Broken Belt Torque 24-** Appl. Functions 2
16-84 Comm. Option STW 20-35 Duct 1 Area [in2] 21-4* Ext. CL 2 PID 22-62 Broken Belt Delay 24-0* Fire Mode
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 20-36 Duct 2 Area [m2] 21-40 Ext. 2 Normal/Inverse Control 22-7* Short Cycle Protection 24-00 Fire Mode Function
16-86 FC Port REF 1 20-37 Duct 2 Area [in2] 21-41 Ext. 2 Proportional Gain 22-75 Short Cycle Protection 24-01 Fire Mode Configuration
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts 20-38 Air Density Factor [%] 21-42 Ext. 2 Integral Time 22-76 Interval between Starts 24-02 Fire Mode Unit
16-90 Alarm Word 20-6* Sensorless 21-43 Ext. 2 Differentation Time 22-77 Minimum Run Time 24-03 Fire Mode Min Reference
16-91 Alarm Word 2 20-60 Sensorless Unit 21-44 Ext. 2 Dif. Gain Limit 22-78 Minimum Run Time Override 24-04 Fire Mode Max Reference
16-92 Warning Word 20-69 Sensorless Information 21-5* Ext. CL 3 Ref./Fb. 22-79 Minimum Run Time Override Value 24-05 Fire Mode Preset Reference
16-93 Warning Word 2 20-7* PID Autotuning 21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./Feedback Unit 22-8* Flow Compensation 24-06 Fire Mode Reference Source
16-94 Ext. Status Word 20-70 Closed Loop Type 21-51 Ext. 3 Minimum Reference 22-80 Flow Compensation 24-07 Fire Mode Feedback Source
16-95 Ext. Status Word 2 20-71 PID Performance 21-52 Ext. 3 Maximum Reference 22-81 Square-linear Curve Approximation 24-09 Fire Mode Alarm Handling
16-96 Maintenance Word 20-72 PID Output Change 21-53 Ext. 3 Reference Source 22-82 Work Point Calculation 24-1* Drive Bypass
18-** Info & Readouts 20-73 Minimum Feedback Level 21-54 Ext. 3 Feedback Source 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM] 24-10 Drive Bypass Function
18-0* Maintenance Log 20-74 Maximum Feedback Level 21-55 Ext. 3 Setpoint 22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz] 24-11 Drive Bypass Delay Time

MG11F502
24-9* Multi-Motor Funct. 25-91 Manual Alternation 35-00 Term. X48/4 Temperature Unit
24-90 Missing Motor Function 26-** Analog I/O Option 35-01 Term. X48/4 Input Type
24-91 Missing Motor Coefficient 1 26-0* Analog I/O Mode 35-02 Term. X48/7 Temperature Unit
24-92 Missing Motor Coefficient 2 26-00 Terminal X42/1 Mode 35-03 Term. X48/7 Input Type

MG11F502
24-93 Missing Motor Coefficient 3 26-01 Terminal X42/3 Mode 35-04 Term. X48/10 Temperature Unit
24-94 Missing Motor Coefficient 4 26-02 Terminal X42/5 Mode 35-05 Term. X48/10 Input Type
24-95 Locked Rotor Function 26-1* Analog Input X42/1 35-06 Temperature Sensor Alarm Function
24-96 Locked Rotor Coefficient 1 26-10 Terminal X42/1 Low Voltage 35-1* Temp. Input X48/4
24-97 Locked Rotor Coefficient 2 26-11 Terminal X42/1 High Voltage 35-14 Term. X48/4 Filter Time Constant
How to Programme

24-98 Locked Rotor Coefficient 3 26-14 Term. X42/1 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 35-15 Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor
24-99 Locked Rotor Coefficient 4 26-15 Term. X42/1 High Ref./Feedb. Value 35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit
25-** Cascade Controller 26-16 Term. X42/1 Filter Time Constant 35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit
25-0* System Settings 26-17 Term. X42/1 Live Zero 35-2* Temp. Input X48/7
25-00 Cascade Controller 26-2* Analog Input X42/3 35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant
25-02 Motor Start 26-20 Terminal X42/3 Low Voltage 35-25 Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor
25-04 Pump Cycling 26-21 Terminal X42/3 High Voltage 35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit
25-05 Fixed Lead Pump 26-24 Term. X42/3 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit
25-06 Number of Pumps 26-25 Term. X42/3 High Ref./Feedb. Value 35-3* Temp. Input X48/10
25-2* Bandwidth Settings 26-26 Term. X42/3 Filter Time Constant 35-34 Term. X48/10 Filter Time Constant
25-20 Staging Bandwidth 26-27 Term. X42/3 Live Zero 35-35 Term. X48/10 Temp. Monitor
25-21 Override Bandwidth 26-3* Analog Input X42/5 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit
25-22 Fixed Speed Bandwidth 26-30 Terminal X42/5 Low Voltage 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit
25-23 SBW Staging Delay 26-31 Terminal X42/5 High Voltage 35-4* Analog Input X48/2
25-24 SBW Destaging Delay 26-34 Term. X42/5 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current
25-25 OBW Time 26-35 Term. X42/5 High Ref./Feedb. Value 35-43 Term. X48/2 High Current
25-26 Destage At No-Flow 26-36 Term. X42/5 Filter Time Constant 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
25-27 Stage Function 26-37 Term. X42/5 Live Zero 35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./Feedb. Value
25-28 Stage Function Time 26-4* Analog Out X42/7 35-46 Term. X48/2 Filter Time Constant
25-29 Destage Function 26-40 Terminal X42/7 Output 35-47 Term. X48/2 Live Zero
25-30 Destage Function Time 26-41 Terminal X42/7 Min. Scale
25-4* Staging Settings 26-42 Terminal X42/7 Max. Scale
25-40 Ramp Down Delay 26-43 Terminal X42/7 Bus Control
Operating Instructions

25-41 Ramp Up Delay 26-44 Terminal X42/7 Timeout Preset


25-42 Staging Threshold 26-5* Analog Out X42/9
25-43 Destaging Threshold 26-50 Terminal X42/9 Output
25-44 Staging Speed [RPM] 26-51 Terminal X42/9 Min. Scale
25-45 Staging Speed [Hz] 26-52 Terminal X42/9 Max. Scale
25-46 Destaging Speed [RPM] 26-53 Terminal X42/9 Bus Control
25-47 Destaging Speed [Hz] 26-54 Terminal X42/9 Timeout Preset
25-5* Alternation Settings 26-6* Analog Out X42/11

Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved.


25-50 Lead Pump Alternation 26-60 Terminal X42/11 Output
25-51 Alternation Event 26-61 Terminal X42/11 Min. Scale
25-52 Alternation Time Interval 26-62 Terminal X42/11 Max. Scale
25-53 Alternation Timer Value 26-63 Terminal X42/11 Bus Control
25-54 Alternation Predefined Time 26-64 Terminal X42/11 Timeout Preset
25-55 Alternate if Load < 50% 30-** Special Features
25-56 Staging Mode at Alternation 30-2* Adv. Start Adjust
25-58 Run Next Pump Delay 30-22 Locked Rotor Detection
25-59 Run on Mains Delay 30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s]
25-8* Status 31-** Bypass Option
25-80 Cascade Status 31-00 Bypass Mode
25-81 Pump Status 31-01 Bypass Start Time Delay
25-82 Lead Pump 31-02 Bypass Trip Time Delay
25-83 Relay Status 31-03 Test Mode Activation
25-84 Pump ON Time 31-10 Bypass Status Word
25-85 Relay ON Time 31-11 Bypass Running Hours
25-86 Reset Relay Counters 31-19 Remote Bypass Activation
25-9* Service 35-** Sensor Input Option
25-90 Pump Interlock 35-0* Temp. Input Mode

105
6 6
General Specifications Operating Instructions

7 General Specifications

Mains supply (L1, L2, L3)


Supply voltage 380–480 V ±10%
Supply voltage 525–690 V ±10%
Mains voltage low/mains drop-out:
During low mains voltage or a mains drop-out, the frequency converter continues until the intermediate circuit voltage drops
below the minimum stop level. The stop level normally corresponds to 15% below the frequency converter’s lowest rated supply
voltage. Power-up and full torque cannot be expected at mains voltage lower than 10% below the frequency converter’s lowest
rated supply voltage.
Supply frequency 50/60 Hz ±5%
Maximum imbalance temporary between mains phases 3.0% of rated supply voltage
True power factor (λ) ≥0.9 nominal at rated load
Displacement power factor (cosφ) near unity (> 0.98)
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) maximum once/2 min.

7 7 Environment according to EN60664-1 overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2


The unit is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 480/690 V
maximum.

7.1 Motor Output and Motor Data


Motor output (U, V, W)
Output voltage 0–100% of supply voltage
Output frequency 0–5901) Hz
Switching on output unlimited
Ramp times 1–3600 s
1) Voltage and power-dependent.

Torque characteristics
Starting torque (constant torque) maximum 110% for 1 min.1)
Starting torque maximum 135% up to 0.5 s1)
Overload torque (constant torque) maximum 110% for 1 min.1)
1) Percentage relates to the frequency converter's nominal torque.

7.2 Ambient Conditions


Surroundings
Enclosure size E IP00, IP21, IP54
Enclosure size F IP21, IP54
Vibration test 1g
Relative humidity 5% - 95% (IEC 721-3-3; Class 3K3 (non-condensing) during operation
Aggressive environment (IEC 721-3-3), coated 3C3
Test method according to IEC 60068-2-43 H2S 10 days
Ambient temperature (at 60 AVM switching mode)
- with derating maximum 55 °C1)
- with full output power, typical EFF2 motors maximum 50 °C1)
- at full continuous frequency converter output current maximum 45 °C1)
1) For more information on derating, see the section on special conditions in the design guide.

106 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


General Specifications Operating Instructions

Minimum ambient temperature during full-scale operation 0 °C


Minimum ambient temperature at reduced performance -10 °C
Temperature during storage/transport -25 to +65/70 °C
Maximum altitude above sea level without derating 1000 m
Maximum altitude above sea level with derating 3000 m
For more information on derating for high altitude, see the section on special conditions in the design guide.
EMC standards, Emission EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-3/4, EN 55011, IEC 61800-3
EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-1/2,
EMC standards, Immunity EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6
Energy efficiency class2) IE2
For more information, see the section on special conditions in the design guide.
2) Determined according to EN50598-2 at:

• Rated load

• 90% rated frequency

• Switching frequency factory setting

• Switching pattern factory setting


7 7
7.3 Cable Specifications
Cable lengths and cross-sections
Maximum motor cable length, screened/armoured 150 m
Maximum motor cable length, unscreened/unarmoured 300 m
Maximum cross-section to motor, mains, load sharing and brake1)
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, rigid wire 1.5 mm2/16 AWG (2 x 0.75 mm2)
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, flexible cable 1 mm2/18 AWG
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, cable with enclosed core 0.5 mm2/20 AWG
Minimum cross-section to control terminals 0.25 mm2
1) See chapter 7.5 Electrical Data for more information.

7.4 Control Input/Ouput and Control Data


Digital inputs
Programmable digital inputs 4 (6)
Terminal number 18, 19, 271), 291), 32, 33,
Logic PNP or NPN
Voltage level 0–24 V DC
Voltage level, logic '0' PNP <5 V DC
Voltage level, logic '1' PNP >10 V DC
Voltage level, logic '0' NPN >19 V DC
Voltage level, logic '1' NPN <14 V DC
Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC
Input resistance, Ri approx. 4 kΩ
All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
1) Terminals 27 and 29 can also be programmed as output.

Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 2
Terminal number 53, 54
Modes voltage or current
Mode select switches S201 and S202
Voltage mode switch S201/S202 = OFF (U)
Voltage level 0-10 V (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri approx. 10 kΩ

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 107


General Specifications Operating Instructions

Maximum voltage ±20 V


Current mode switch S201/S202=On (I)
Current level 0/4-20 mA (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri approx. 200 Ω
Maximum current 30 mA
Resolution for analog inputs 10 bit (+ sign)
Accuracy of analog inputs maximum error 0.5% of full scale
Bandwidth 200 Hz
The analog inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
PELV isolation

130BA117.10
+24V
Control Mains
18

High
voltage Motor
37
Functional
isolation

7 7 RS485 DC-Bus

Illustration 7.1 PELV Isolation of Analog Inputs

Pulse inputs
Programmable pulse inputs 2
Terminal number pulse 29, 33
Maximum frequency at terminal 29, 33 110 kHz (push-pull driven)
Maximum frequency at terminal 29, 33 5 kHz (open collector)
Minimum frequency at terminal 29, 33 4 Hz
Voltage level see Digital inputs
Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC
Input resistance, Ri approx. 4 kΩ
Pulse input accuracy (0.1–1 kHz) maximum error 0.1% of full scale

Analog output
Number of programmable analog outputs 1
Terminal number 42
Current range at analog output 0/4–20 mA
Maximum resistor load to common at analog output 500 Ω
Accuracy on analog output maximum error 0.8% of full scale
Resolution on analog output 8 bit
The analog output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.

Control card, RS-485 serial communication


Terminal number 68 (P,TX+, RX+), 69 (N,TX-, RX-)
Terminal number 61 common for terminals 68 and 69
The RS-485 serial communication circuit is functionally separated from other central circuits and galvanically isolated from the
supply voltage (PELV).

Digital output
Programmable digital/pulse outputs 2
Terminal number 27, 291)
Voltage level at digital/frequency output 0–24 V
Maximum output current (sink or source) 40 mA
Maximum load at frequency output 1 kΩ
Maximum capacitive load at frequency output 10 nF
Minimum output frequency at frequency output 0 Hz

108 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


General Specifications Operating Instructions

Maximum output frequency at frequency output 32 kHz


Accuracy of frequency output maximum error 0.1% of full scale
Resolution of frequency outputs 12 bit
1) Terminal 27 and 29 can also be programmed as input.
The digital output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.

Control card, 24 V DC output


Terminal number 12, 13
Maximum load 200 mA
The 24 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV), but has the same potential as the analog and digital
inputs and outputs.

Relay outputs
Programmable relay outputs 2
Relay 01 terminal number 1-3 (break), 1-2 (make)
Maximum terminal load (AC-1)1) on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO) (resistive load) 240 V AC, 2 A
Maximum terminal load (AC-15)1) (inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Maximum terminal load (DC-1)1) on 1-2 (NO), 1-3 (NC) (resistive load)
Maximum terminal load (DC-13)1) (inductive load)
60 V DC, 1 A
24 V DC, 0.1 A
7 7
Relay 02 terminal number 4-6 (break), 4-5 (make)
Maximum terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (resistive load)2) 3) 400 V AC, 2 A
Maximum terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-5 (NO) (inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Maximum terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (resistive load) 80 V DC, 2 A
Maximum terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-5 (NO) (inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
Maximum terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (resistive load) 240 V AC, 2 A
Maximum terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-6 (NC) (inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Maximum terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (resistive load) 50 V DC, 2 A
Maximum terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-6 (NC) (inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
Minimum terminal load on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO), 4-6 (NC), 4-5 (NO) 24 V DC, 10 mA, 24 V AC, 20 mA
Environment according to EN 60664-1 overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
1) IEC 60947 parts 4 and 5.
The relay contacts are galvanically isolated from the rest of the circuit by reinforced isolation (PELV).
2) Overvoltage category II.
3) UL applications 300 V AC 2 A.

Control card, 10 V DC output


Terminal number 50
Output voltage 10.5 V ±0.5 V
Maximum load 25 mA
The 10 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.

Control characteristics
Resolution of output frequency at 0–590 Hz ±0.003 Hz
System response time (terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33) ≤2 ms
Speed control range (open loop) 1:100 of synchronous speed
Speed accuracy (open loop) 30–4000 RPM: maximum error of ±8 RPM
All control characteristics are based on a 4-pole asynchronous motor.

Control card performance


Scan interval 5 ms

Control card, USB serial communication


USB standard 1.1 (full speed)
USB plug USB type B “device” plug

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 109


General Specifications Operating Instructions

CAUTION
Connection to PC is carried out via a standard host/device USB cable.
The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
The USB connection is NOT galvanically isolated from protective earth. Use only isolated laptop/PC as connection to the
USB connector on the frequency converter or an isolated USB cable/converter.

Protection and features


• Electronic thermal motor protection against overload.
• If the temperature reaches a predefined level, temperature monitoring of the heat sink ensures that the frequency
converter trips. An overload temperature cannot be reset until the temperature of the heat sink is below the
values stated in Table 7.1 to Table 7.4 (Guideline - these temperatures may vary for different power sizes, enclosure
sizes, enclosure ratings etc.).

• The frequency converter is protected against short circuits on motor terminals U, V, W.

• If a mains phase is missing, the frequency converter trips or issues a warning (depending on the load).

• If the intermediate circuit voltage is too low or too high, monitoring of the intermediate circuit voltage ensures
that the frequency converter trips.
7 7 • The frequency converter is protected against ground faults on motor terminals U, V, W.

110 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


General Specifications Operating Instructions

7.5 Electrical Data


Mains Supply 3 x 380-480 V AC
P315 P355 P400 P450
Typical shaft output at 400 V
315 355 400 450
[kW]
Typical shaft output at 460 V
450 500 600 600
[hp]
Enclosure protection rating
E1 E1 E1 E1
IP21
Enclosure protection rating
E1 E1 E1 E1
IP54
Enclosure protection rating
E2 E2 E2 E2
IP00
Output current
Continuous
600 658 745 800
(at 400 V) [A]

7 7
Intermittent (60 s overload)
660 724 820 880
(at 400 V) [A]
Continuous
540 590 678 730
(at 460/480 V) [A]
Intermittent (60 s overload)
594 649 746 803
(at 460/480 V) [A]
Continuous KVA
416 456 516 554
(at 400 V) [KVA]
Continuous KVA
430 470 540 582
(at 460 V) [KVA]
Maximum input current
Continuous
590 647 733 787
(at 400 V) [A]
Continuous
531 580 667 718
(at 460/480 V) [A]
Maximum cable size, mains,
4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240
motor and load share [mm2
(4 x 500 mcm) (4 x 500 mcm) (4 x 500 mcm) (4 x 500 mcm)
(AWG2))]
Maximum cable size, brake 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185 2 x 185
[mm2 (AWG2)) (2 x 350 mcm) (2 x 350 mcm) (2 x 350 mcm) (2 x 350 mcm)
Maximum external pre-fuses
700 800 900 900
[A]1)
Estimated power loss
6790 7701 8677 9473
at rated max. load [W]3), 400 V
Estimated power loss
at rated maximum load [W]3), 6082 6953 7819 8527
460 V
Weight,
enclosure protection rating 263 270 272 313
IP21, IP54 [kg]
Weight,
enclosure protection rating 221 234 236 277
IP00 [kg]
Efficiency4) 0.98
Output frequency 0-590 Hz
Heat sink overtemperature trip 110 °C
Power card ambient trip 75°C 85 °C

Table 7.1 Mains Supply 3 x 380-480 V AC

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 111


General Specifications Operating Instructions

Mains Supply 3 x 380-480 V AC


P500 P560 P630 P710 P800 P1M0
Typical shaft output at 400 V [kW] 500 560 630 710 800 1000
Typical shaft output at 460 V [hp] 650 750 900 1000 1200 1350
Enclosure protection rating IP21,
F1/F3 F1/F3 F1/F3 F1/F3 F2/F4 F2/F4
IP54 without/with options cabinet
Output current
Continuous
880 990 1120 1260 1460 1720
(at 400 V) [A]
Intermittent (60 s overload)
968 1089 1232 1386 1606 1892
(at 400 V) [A]
Continuous
780 890 1050 1160 1380 1530
(at 460/480 V) [A]
Intermittent (60 s overload)
858 979 1155 1276 1518 1683
(at 460/480 V) [A]
Continuous KVA
610 686 776 873 1012 1192
(at 400 V) [KVA]

7 7 Continuous KVA
(at 460 V) [KVA]
621 709 837 924 1100 1219

Maximum input current


Continuous
857 964 1090 1227 1422 1675
(at 400 V) [A]
Continuous (at 460/480 V) [A] 759 867 1022 1129 1344 1490
Maximum cable size, motor [mm2 8 x 150 12 x 150
(AWG2))] (8 x 300 mcm) (12 x 300 mcm)
Maximum cable size, mains F1/F2 8 x 240
[mm2 (AWG2))] (8 x 500 mcm)
Maximum cable size, mains F3/F4 8 x 456
[mm2 (AWG2))] (8 x 900 mcm)
Maximum cable size, loadsharing 4 x 120
[mm2 (AWG2))] (4 x 250 mcm)
Maximum cable size, brake [mm2 4 x 185 6 x 185
(AWG2)) (4 x 350 mcm) (6 x 350 mcm)
Maximum external pre-fuses [A]1) 1600 2000 2500
Estimated power loss at rated
maximum load [W]3), 400 V, F1 & 10162 11822 12512 14674 17293 19278
F2
Estimated power loss at rated
maximum load [W]3), 460 V, F1 & 8876 10424 11595 13213 16229 16624
F2
Maximum added losses of A1 RFI,
circuit breaker or disconnect, & 963 1054 1093 1230 2280 2541
contactor, F3 & F4
Maximum panel options losses 400
Weight,
enclosure protection rating IP21, 1017/1318 1260/1561
IP54 [kg]
Weight rectifier
102 136
module [kg]
Weight inverter
102 136 102
module [kg]
Efficiency4) 0.98
Output frequency 0-590 Hz
Heat sink overtemperature trip 95 °C
Power card ambient trip 85 °C

Table 7.2 Mains Supply 3 x 380-480 V AC

112 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


General Specifications Operating Instructions

Mains Supply 3 x 525-690 V AC


P450 P500 P560 P630
Typical shaft output at 550 V [kW] 355 400 450 500
Typical shaft output at 575 V [hp] 450 500 600 650
Typical shaft output at 690 V [kW] 450 500 560 630
Enclosure protection rating IP21 E1 E1 E1 E1
Enclosure protection rating IP54 E1 E1 E1 E1
Enclosure protection rating IP00 E2 E2 E2 E2
Output current
Continuous
470 523 596 630
(at 550 V) [A]
Intermittent (60 s overload)
517 575 656 693
(at 550 V) [A]
Continuous
450 500 570 630
(at 575/ 690 V) [A]
Intermittent (60 s overload)
495 550 627 693
(at 575/ 690 V) [A]
Continuous KVA
(at 550 V) [KVA]
448 498 568 600 7 7
Continuous KVA
448 498 568 627
(at 575 V) [KVA]
Continuous KVA
538 598 681 753
(at 690 V) [KVA]
Maximum input current
Continuous 453
504 574 607
(at 550 V) [A]
Continuous 434
482 549 607
(at 575 V) [A]
Continuous 434
482 549 607
(at 690 V) [A]
Maximum cable size, mains,
2x240 (2x500
motor and load share [mm2 4x240 (4x500 mcm) 4x240 (4x500 mcm) 4x240 (4x500 mcm)
mcm)
(AWG)]
Maximum cable size, brake [mm2 2x185 (2x350 2x185 2x185 2x185
(AWG)] mcm) (2x350 mcm) (2x350 mcm) (2x350 mcm)
Maximum external pre-fuses [A]1) 700 700 900 900
Estimated power loss
at rated maximum load [W]3), 600 5323 6010 7395 8209
V
Estimated power loss
at rated maximum load [W]3), 690 5529 6239 7653 8495
V
Weight,
enclosure protection ratings IP21, 263 263 272 313
IP54 [kg]
Weight,
enclosure protection rating IP00 221 221 236 277
[kg]
Efficiency4) 0.98
Output frequency 0-525 Hz
Heat sink overtemperature trip 110 °C 95 °C 110 °C
Power card ambient trip 85 °C

Table 7.3 Mains Supply 3 x 525-690 V AC

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 113


General Specifications Operating Instructions

Mains Supply 3 x 525-690 V AC


P710 P800 P900 P1M0 P1M2 P1M4
Typical shaft output at 550 V [kW] 560 670 750 850 1000 1100
Typical shaft output at 575 V [hp] 750 950 1050 1150 1350 1550
Typical shaft output at 690 V [kW] 710 800 900 1000 1200 1400
Enclosure protection ratings IP21, IP54
F1/F3 F1/F3 F1/F3 F2/F4 F2/F4 F2/F4
without/with options cabinet
Output current
Continuous
763 889 988 1108 1317 1479
(at 550 V) [A]
Intermittent (60 s overload, at 550 V) [A] 839 978 1087 1219 1449 1627
Continuous
730 850 945 1060 1260 1415
(at 575/690 V) [A]
Intermittent (60 s overload, at 575/690 V)
803 935 1040 1166 1386 1557
[A]
Continuous KVA
727 847 941 1056 1255 1409
(at 550 V) [KVA]

7 7 Continuous KVA
(at 575 V) [KVA]
727 847 941 1056 1255 1409

Continuous KVA
872 1016 1129 1267 1506 1691
(at 690 V) [KVA]
Maximum input current
Continuous
743 866 962 1079 1282 1440
(at 550 V) [A]
Continuous
711 828 920 1032 1227 1378
(at 575 V) [A]
Continuous
711 828 920 1032 1227 1378
(at 690 V) [A]
Maximum cable size, motor [mm2
8x150 (8x300 mcm) 12x150 (12x300 mcm)
(AWG2))]
Maximum cable size, mains F1/F2 [mm2
8x240 (8x500 mcm)
(AWG2))]
Maximum cable size, mains F3/F4 [mm2
8x456 (8x900 mcm)
(AWG2))]
Maximum cable size, loadsharing [mm2
4x120 (4x250 mcm)
(AWG2))]
Maximum cable size, brake [mm2 (AWG2)) 4x185 (4x350 mcm) 6x185 (6x350 mcm)
Maximum external pre-fuses [A]1) 1600 2000 2500
Estimated power loss at rated maximum
9500 10872 12316 13731 16190 18536
load [W]3), 600 V, F1 & F2
Estimated power loss at rated maximum
9863 11304 12798 14250 16821 19247
load [W]3), 690 V, F1 & F2
Maximum added losses of circuit breaker
427 532 615 665 863 1044
or disconnect & contactor, F3 & F4
Maximum panel options losses 400
Weight, enclosure protection ratings IP21,
1004/1299 1004/1299 1004/1299 1246/1541 1246/1541 1280/1575
IP54 [kg]
Weight, rectifier module [kg] 102 102 102 136 136 136
Weight, inverter module [kg] 102 102 136 102 102 136
Efficiency4) 0.98
Output frequency 0-500 Hz
Heat sink overtemperature trip 95 °C 105 °C 95 °C 95 °C 105 °C 95 °C
Power card ambient trip 85 °C

Table 7.4 Mains Supply 3 x 525-690 V AC

114 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


General Specifications Operating Instructions

1) For type of fuse see chapter 4.1.14 Fuses.


2) American wire gauge.
3) Applies for dimensioning of frequency converter cooling. If the switching frequency is higher than the default
setting, the power losses may increase. LCP and typical control card power consumptions are included. For power
loss data according to EN 50598-2, refer to www.danfoss.com/vltenergyefficiency.
4) Efficiency measured at nominal current. For energy efficiency class see chapter 7.2 Ambient Conditions. For part
load losses see www.danfoss.com/vltenergyefficiency.

7 7

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 115


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

8 Warnings and Alarms

LEDs on the front of the frequency converter indicate if a If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its
warning or an alarm has occurred. For each warning and cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked
alarm there is a specific code, which is shown on the (see also Table 8.1).
display.

A warning remains active until its cause is no longer


CAUTION
present. Under certain circumstances operation of the Alarms that are trip-locked offer extra protection,
motor may still continue. Warning messages may in some meaning that the mains supply must be switched off
cases be critical. before the alarm can be reset. After being switched back
on, the frequency converter is no longer blocked and
may be reset as described previously once the cause has
If an alarm occurs, the frequency converter trips. To restart
been rectified.
operation, reset alarms once their causes have been
Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using
rectified.
the automatic reset function in 14-20 Reset Mode
(Warning: Automatic wake-up is possible!)
Reset can be done in 4 ways: Table 8.1 specifies whether a warning occurs before an
• Pressing [Reset] on the LCP. alarm, or whether to display a warning or an alarm for a

8 8 Via a digital input with the Reset function. given fault.
This is possible, for instance, in parameter 1-90 Motor
• Via serial communication/optional fieldbus.
Thermal Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor
• By resetting automatically using the Auto Reset carries on coasting, and the alarm and warning flash on
function (default). the frequency converter. Once the problem has been
NOTICE rectified, only the alarm continues flashing.

After a manual reset pressing [Reset], press [Auto On] or


[Hand On] to restart the motor.

No. Description Warning Alarm/trip Alarm/trip lock Parameter reference


1 10 volts low X
2 Live zero error (X) (X) 6-01
3 No motor (X) 1-80
4 Mains phase loss (X) (X) (X) 14-12
5 DC link voltage high X
6 DC link voltage low X
7 DC overvoltage X X
8 DC undervoltage X X
9 Inverter overloaded X X
10 Motor ETR overtemperature (X) (X) 1-90
11 Motor thermistor overtemperature (X) (X) 1-90
12 Torque limit X X
13 Overcurrent X X X
14 Earth fault X X X
15 Hardware mismatch X X
16 Short circuit X X
17 Control word timeout (X) (X) 8-04
23 Internal fan fault X
24 External fan fault X 14-53
25 Brake resistor short-circuited X
26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) 2-13
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X
28 Brake check (X) (X) 2-15
29 Drive overtemperature X X X

116 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

No. Description Warning Alarm/trip Alarm/trip lock Parameter reference


30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
33 Inrush fault X X
34 Fieldbus communication fault X X
35 Out of frequency range X X
36 Mains failure X X
37 Phase imbalance X X
38 Internal fault X X
39 Heat sink sensor X X
40 Overload of digital output terminal 27 (X) 5-00, 5-01
41 Overload of digital output terminal 29 (X) 5-00, 5-02
42 Overload of digital outpu on X30/6 (X) 5-32
42 Overload of digital output on X30/7 (X) 5-33
46 Pwr. card supply X X
47 24 V supply low X X X
48 1.8 V supply low X X
49 Speed limit X (X) 1-86
50 AMA calibration failed X
51
52
AMA check Unom and Inom
AMA low Inom
X
X
8 8
53 AMA motor too big X
54 AMA motor too small X
55 AMA parameter out of range X
56 AMA interrupted by user X
57 AMA timeout X
58 AMA internal fault X X
59 Current limit X
60 External interlock X
62 Output frequency at maximum limit X
64 Voltage limit X
65 Control board over temperature X X X
66 Heat sink temperature low X
67 Option configuration has changed X
69 Pwr. card temp X X
70 Illegal FC configuration X
71 PTC 1 safe stop X X1)
72 Dangerous failure X1)
73 Safe stop auto restart
76 Power unit setup X
79 Illegal PS config X X
80 Drive initialized to default value X
91 Analog input 54 wrong settings X
92 No flow X X 22-2*
93 Dry pump X X 22-2*
94 End of curve X X 22-5*
95 Broken belt X X 22-6*
96 Start delayed X 22-7*
97 Stop delayed X 22-7*
98 Clock fault X 0-7*
201 Fire M was active
202 Fire M limits exceeded
203 Missing motor

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 117


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

No. Description Warning Alarm/trip Alarm/trip lock Parameter reference


204 Locked rotor
243 Brake IGBT X X
244 Heat sink temp X X X
245 Heat sink sensor X X
246 Pwr.card supply X X
247 Pwr.card temp X X
248 Illegal PS config X X
250 New spare parts X
251 New type code X X

Table 8.1 Alarm/Warning Code List


(X) Dependent on parameter. when an alarm occurs, which may damage the frequency
1) Cannot be auto reset via 14-20 Reset Mode. converter or connected parts. A trip lock situation can only
be reset by a power cycling.
A trip is the action when an alarm has appeared. The trip
coasts the motor and can be reset by pressing [Reset] or
Warning yellow
by using the Reset function via a digital input (parameter
Alarm flashing red
group 5-1* Digital Inputs [1]). The original event that
Trip locked yellow and red
caused an alarm cannot damage the frequency converter
or cause dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an action
8 8 Table 8.2 LED Indication

118 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

Alarm Word and Extended Status Word


Bit Hex Dec Alarm Word Warning Word Extended Status Word
0 00000001 1 Brake Check Brake Check Ramping
1 00000002 2 Pwr. Card Temp Pwr. Card Temp AMA Running
2 00000004 4 Earth Fault Earth Fault Start CW/CCW
3 00000008 8 Ctrl.Card Temp Ctrl.Card Temp Slow Down
4 00000010 16 Ctrl. Word TO Ctrl. Word TO Catch Up
5 00000020 32 Over Current Over Current Feedback High
6 00000040 64 Torque Limit Torque Limit Feedback Low
7 00000080 128 Motor Th Over Motor Th Over Output Current High
8 00000100 256 Motor ETR Over Motor ETR Over Output Current Low
9 00000200 512 Inverter Overld. Inverter Overld. Output Freq High
10 00000400 1024 DC under Volt DC under Volt Output Freq Low
11 00000800 2048 DC over Volt DC over Volt Brake Check OK
12 00001000 4096 Short Circuit DC Voltage Low Braking Max
13 00002000 8192 Inrush Fault DC Voltage High Braking
14 00004000 16384 Mains ph. Loss Mains ph. Loss Out of Speed Range
15 00008000 32768 AMA Not OK No Motor OVC Active
16 00010000 65536 Live Zero Error Live Zero Error
17 00020000 131072 Internal Fault 10V Low
18
19
00040000
00080000
262144
524288
Brake Overload
U phase Loss
Brake Overload
Brake Resistor
8 8
20 00100000 1048576 V phase Loss Brake IGBT
21 00200000 2097152 W phase Loss Speed Limit
22 00400000 4194304 Fieldbus Fault Fieldbus Fault
23 00800000 8388608 24V Supply Low 24V Supply Low
24 01000000 16777216 Mains Failure Mains Failure
25 02000000 33554432 1.8V Supply Low Current Limit
26 04000000 67108864 Brake Resistor Low Temp
27 08000000 134217728 Brake IGBT Voltage Limit
28 10000000 268435456 Option Change Unused
29 20000000 536870912 Drive Initialized Unused
30 40000000 1073741824 Safe Stop Unused

Table 8.3 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word

The alarm words, warning words and extended status words can be read out via serial bus or optional fieldbus for
diagnosis. See also 16-90 Alarm Word, 16-92 Warning Word and 16-94 Ext. Status Word.
The warning/alarm information in this chapter defines each WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error
warning/alarm condition, provides the probable cause for This warning or alarm only appears if programmed in
the condition, and details a remedy or troubleshooting parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on
procedure. one of the analog inputs is less than 50% of the minimum
value programmed for that input. Broken wiring or signals
WARNING 1, 10 Volts low
The control card voltage from terminal 50 is <10 V. being sent by a faulty device causes this condition.
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 V Troubleshooting
supply is overloaded. Max. 15 mA or minimum 590 Ω. • Check connections on all the analog input
terminals. Control card terminals 53 and 54 for
A short circuit in a connected potentiometer or improper
signals, terminal 55 common. MCB 101 terminals
wiring of the potentiometer can cause this condition.
11 and 12 for signals, terminal 10 common. MCB
Troubleshooting 109 terminals 1, 3, 5 for signals, terminals 2, 4, 6
• Remove the wiring from terminal 50. common).
• If the warning clears, the problem is with the • Check that the frequency converter programming
customer wiring. and switch settings match the analog signal type.
• If the warning does not clear, replace the control • Perform an input terminal signal test.
card.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 119


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

WARNING 3, No motor Troubleshooting


No motor has been connected to the output of the • Compare the output current shown on the LCP
frequency converter. with the frequency converter rated current.
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss • Compare the output current shown on the LCP
A phase is missing on the supply side, or the mains with measured motor current.
voltage imbalance is too high. This message also appears
in case of a fault in the input rectifier on the frequency
• Display the thermal drive load on the LCP and
monitor the value. When running above the
converter. Options are programmed in 14-12 Function at frequency converter continuous current rating,
Mains Imbalance. the counter should increase. When running below
Troubleshooting the frequency converter continuous current
• Check the supply voltage and supply currents to rating, the counter should decrease.
the frequency converter.
WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature
WARNING 5, DC link voltage high According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than the motor is too hot. Select whether the frequency converter
high-voltage warning limit. The limit depends on the issues a warning or an alarm when the counter reaches
frequency converter voltage rating. The unit is still active. 100% in parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. The fault
occurs when the motor overload exceeds 100% for too
WARNING 6, DC link voltage low
long.
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is lower than the low-
voltage warning limit. The limit depends on the frequency Troubleshooting
converter voltage rating. The unit is still active. • Check for motor overheating.
8 8 WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage • Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit, the
frequency converter trips after some time.
• Check that the motor current set in
parameter 1-24 Motor Current is correct.
Troubleshooting
• Ensure the motor data in parameters 1-20
• Connect a brake resistor. through 1-25 is set correctly.
• Extend the ramp time.
• If an external fan is used, check that it is selected
• Change the ramp type. in 1-91 Motor External Fan.

• Activate the functions in parameter 2-10 Brake • Running AMA in parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor
Function. Adaptation (AMA) tunes the frequency converter
to the motor more accurately and reduces
• Increase 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault.
thermal loading.
WARNING/ALARM 8, DC under voltage
If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC link) drops below WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor over temp
the undervoltage limit, the frequency converter checks if a The thermistor might be disconnected. Select whether the
24 V DC back-up supply is connected. If no 24 V DC back- frequency converter issues a warning or an alarm in
up supply is connected, the frequency converter trips after parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.
a fixed time delay. The time delay varies with unit size. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting • Check for motor overheating.
• Check that the supply voltage matches the • Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
frequency converter voltage.
• Check that the thermistor is connected correctly
• Perform an input voltage test. between either terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage
input) and terminal 50 (+10 V supply) and that
• Perform a soft charge circuit test.
the terminal switch for 53 or 54 is set for voltage.
WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overload Check parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source selects
The frequency converter is about to cut out because of an terminal 53 or 54.
overload (too high current for too long). The counter for
electronic thermal inverter protection issues a warning at • When using digital inputs 18 or 19, check that
98% and trips at 100%, while issuing an alarm. The the thermistor is connected correctly between
frequency converter cannot be reset until the counter is either terminal 18 or 19 (digital input PNP only)
below 90%. and terminal 50.

• If a KTY sensor is used, check for correct


connection between terminals 54 and 55.

120 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

• If using a thermal switch or thermistor, check that ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch
the programming if 1-93 Thermistor Resource A fitted option is not operational with the present control
matches sensor wiring. board hardware or software.

• If using a KTY sensor, check the programming of Record the value of the following parameters and contact
1-95 KTY Sensor Type, 1-96 KTY Thermistor the local Danfoss supplier:
Resource, and 1-97 KTY Threshold level match
sensor wiring.
• 15-40 FC Type.

WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit


• 15-41 Power Section.

The torque has exceeded the value in 4-16 Torque Limit • 15-42 Voltage.
Motor Mode or the value in 4-17 Torque Limit Generator • 15-43 Software Version.
Mode. 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit can change this from
a warning-only condition to a warning followed by an • 15-45 Actual Typecode String.

alarm. • 15-49 SW ID Control Card.

Troubleshooting • 15-50 SW ID Power Card.


• If the motor torque limit is exceeded during • 15-60 Option Mounted.
ramp-up, extend the ramp-up time.
• 15-61 Option SW Version (for each option slot).
• If the generator torque limit is exceeded during
ALARM 16, Short circuit
ramp down, extend the ramp-down time.
There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring.
• If torque limit occurs while running, possibly
• Remove power from the frequency converter and
increase the torque limit. Be sure that the system
can operate safely at a higher torque. repair the short circuit. 8 8
WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout
• Check the application for excessive current draw
There is no communication to the frequency converter.
on the motor.
The warning is only active when 8-04 Control Word Timeout
WARNING/ALARM 13, Over current Function is NOT set to [0] Off.
The inverter peak current limit (approximately 200% of the If 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to [5] Stop and
rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts about 1.5 s, trip, a warning appears and the frequency converter ramps
then the frequency converter trips and issues an alarm. down until it trips, then it displays an alarm.
Shock loading or fast acceleration with high-inertia loads
can cause this fault. If extended mechanical brake control Troubleshooting
is selected, the trip can be reset externally. • Check the connections on the serial communi-
cation cable.
Troubleshooting
• Remove power and check if the motor shaft can • Increase 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time.
be turned. • Check the operation of the communication
equipment.
• Check that the motor size matches the frequency
converter. • Verify a proper installation based on EMC
requirements.
• Check parameters 1-20 to 1-25 for correct motor
data. ALARM 18, Start failed
The speed has not been able to exceed 1-77 Compressor
ALARM 14, Earth (ground) fault
There is current from the output phases to ground, either Start Max Speed [RPM] during start within the allowed time
in the cable between the frequency converter and the (set in 1-79 Compressor Start Max Time to Trip.) A blocked
motor or in the motor itself. motor may cause this alarm.

Troubleshooting WARNING 23, Internal fan fault


The fan warning function is an extra protective function
• Remove power from the frequency converter and that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
repair the ground fault.
can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
• Check for ground faults in the motor by
For D, E and F enclosure sizes, the regulated voltage to the
measuring the resistance to ground of the motor
leads and the motor with a megohmmeter. fan is monitored.
Troubleshooting
• Perform current sensor test.
• Check fan resistance.
• Check soft charge fuses.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 121


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

WARNING 24, External fan fault • Incorrect airflow clearance above and below the
The fan warning function is an extra protective function frequency converter.
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
• Blocked airflow around the frequency converter.

For D, E and F enclosure sizes, the regulated voltage to the


• Damaged heat sink fan.

fan is monitored. • Dirty heat sink.

Troubleshooting For D, E and F enclosure sizes, this alarm is based on the


temperature measured by the heat sink sensor mounted
• Check fan resistance.
inside the IGBT modules. For F enclosures, the thermal
• Check soft charge fuses. sensor in the rectifier module can also cause this alarm.
WARNING 25, Brake resistor short circuit Troubleshooting
The brake resistor is monitored during operation. If a short
circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and the
• Check fan resistance.
warning appears. The frequency converter is still • Check soft charge fuses.
operational but without the brake function. Remove power • IGBT thermal sensor.
from the frequency converter and replace the brake
ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing
resistor (see 2-15 Brake Check).
Motor phase U between the frequency converter and the
WARNING/ALARM 26, Brake resistor power limit motor is missing.
The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as
Troubleshooting
a mean value over the last 120 s of run time. The
• Remove power from the frequency converter and
8 8 calculation is based on the intermediate circuit voltage and
the brake resistance value set in 2-16 AC brake Max.
check motor phase U.

Current. The warning is active when the dissipated braking ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing
is higher than 90% of the brake resistance power. If [2] Trip Motor phase V between the frequency converter and the
is selected in 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring, the frequency motor is missing.
converter trips when the dissipated braking power reaches Troubleshooting
100%.
• Remove power from the frequency converter and
WARNING/ALARM 27, Brake chopper fault check motor phase V.
The brake transistor is monitored during operation. If a ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing
short circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and a Motor phase W between the frequency converter and the
warning is issued. The frequency converter is still motor is missing.
operational, but since the brake transistor has short-
circuited, substantial power is transmitted to the brake Troubleshooting
resistor, even if it is inactive. • Remove power from the frequency converter and
check motor phase W.
Remove power from the frequency converter and remove
the brake resistor. ALARM 33, Inrush fault
Too many power-ups have occurred within a short time
This alarm/warning could also occur if the brake resistor
period. Let the unit cool to operating temperature.
overheats. Terminals 104 and 106 are available as brake
resistor Klixon inputs, see Brake Resistor Temperature Switch WARNING/ALARM 34, fieldbus communication fault
in the Design Guide. The fieldbus on the communication option card is not
working.
WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed
The brake resistor is not connected or not working. WARNING/ALARM 35, Out of frequency range
Check 2-15 Brake Check. This warning is active if the output frequency has reached
the high limit (set in 4-53 Warning Speed High) or low limit
ALARM 29, Heat sink temp
(set in 4-52 Warning Speed Low). In [3] Closed Loop
The maximum temperature of the heat sink has been
(1-00 Configuration Mode), this warning is displayed.
exceeded. The temperature fault does not reset until the
temperature drops below a defined heat sink temperature. WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure
The trip and reset points are different based on the This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to
frequency converter power size. the frequency converter is lost and 14-10 Mains Failure is
NOT set to [0] No Function.
Troubleshooting
Check the following conditions: Troubleshooting
• Ambient temperature too high. • Check the fuses to the frequency converter and
mains power supply to the unit.
• Motor cable too long.

122 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

ALARM 38, Internal fault No. Text


When an internal fault occurs, a code number defined in 1536 An exception in the application-oriented control is
Table 8.4 is displayed. registered. Debug information written in LCP.

Troubleshooting 1792 DSP watchdog is active. Debugging of power part

• Cycle power. data, motor-oriented control data not transferred


correctly.
• Check that the option is properly installed.
2049 Power data restarted.
• Check for loose or missing wiring. 2064–2072 H081x: option in slot x has restarted.
Contact the Danfoss supplier or Danfoss service if 2080–2088 H082x: option in slot x has issued a power-up
necessary. Note the code number for further trouble- wait.
shooting directions. 2096–2104 H983x: option in slot x has issued a legal power-
up wait.
No. Text 2304 Could not read any data from power EEPROM.
0 Serial port cannot be initialised. Contact the 2305 Missing SW version from power unit.
Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service. 2314 Missing power unit data from power unit.
256–258 Power EEPROM data is defective or too old. 2315 Missing SW version from power unit.
512 Control board EEPROM data is defective or too 2316 Missing lo_statepage from power unit.
old. 2324 Power card configuration is determined to be
513 Communication timeout reading EEPROM data. incorrect at power-up.
514 Communication timeout reading EEPROM data. 2325 A power card has stopped communicating while

8 8
515 Application-oriented control cannot recognise the main power is applied.
EEPROM data. 2326 Power card configuration is determined to be
516 Cannot write to the EEPROM because a write incorrect after the delay for power cards to
command is in progress. register.
517 Write command is under timeout. 2327 Too many power card locations have been
518 Failure in the EEPROM. registered as present.
519 Missing or invalid barcode data in EEPROM. 2330 Power size information between the power cards
783 Parameter value outside of min/max limits. does not match.
1024–1279 Sending a CAN telegram failed. 2561 No communication from DSP to ATACD.
1281 Digital signal processor flash timeout. 2562 No communication from ATACD to DSP (state
1282 Power micro software version mismatch. running).
1283 Power EEPROM data version mismatch. 2816 Stack overflow control board module.
1284 Cannot read digital signal processor software 2817 Scheduler slow tasks.
version. 2818 Fast tasks.
1299 Option SW in slot A is too old. 2819 Parameter thread.
1300 Option SW in slot B is too old. 2820 LCP stack overflow.
1301 Option SW in slot C0 is too old. 2821 Serial port overflow.
1302 Option SW in slot C1 is too old. 2822 USB port overflow.
1315 Option SW in slot A is not supported (not 2836 cfListMempool too small.
allowed). 3072–5122 Parameter value is outside its limits.
1316 Option SW in slot B is not supported (not 5123 Option in slot A: Hardware incompatible with
allowed). control board hardware.
1317 Option SW in slot C0 is not supported (not 5124 Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible with
allowed). Control board hardware.
1318 Option SW in slot C1 is not supported (not 5125 Option in slot C0: Hardware incompatible with
allowed). control board hardware.
1379 Option A did not respond when calculating 5126 Option in slot C1: Hardware incompatible with
platform version. control board hardware.
1380 Option B did not respond when calculating 5376–6231 Out of memory.
platform version.
1381 Option C0 did not respond when calculating Table 8.4 Code Numbers for Internal Faults
platform version.
1382 Option C1 did not respond when calculating ALARM 39, Heat sink sensor
platform version. No feedback from the heat sink temperature sensor.
The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not available on
the power card. The problem could be on the power card,

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 123


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

on the gate drive card, or the ribbon cable between the ALARM 54, AMA motor too small
power card and gate drive card. The motor is too small for the AMA to operate.
WARNING 40, Overload of digital output terminal 27 ALARM 55, AMA parameter out of range
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove the The parameter values of the motor are outside of the
short-circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and acceptable range. AMA does not run.
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode.
ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user
WARNING 41, Overload of digital output terminal 29 The user has interrupted the AMA.
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove the
ALARM 57, AMA internal fault
short-circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and Try to restart AMA a number of times, until the AMA is
parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode. carried out. Note that repeated runs may heat the motor
WARNING 42, Overload of digital output on X30/6 or to a level where the resistance Rs and Rr are increased. In
overload of digital output on X30/7 most cases, however, this is not critical.
For X30/6, check the load connected to X30/6 or remove
ALARM 58, AMA Internal fault
the short-circuit connection. Check 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi
Contact the Danfoss supplier.
Out (MCB 101).
WARNING 59, Current limit
For X30/7, check the load connected to X30/7 or remove
The current is higher than the value in 4-18 Current Limit.
the short-circuit connection. Check 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi
Ensure that motor data in parameters 1-20 to 1-25 are set
Out (MCB 101).
correctly. Possibly increase the current limit. Be sure that
ALARM 46, Power card supply the system can operate safely at a higher limit.

8 8 The supply on the power card is out of range.


There are 3 power supplies generated by the switch mode
WARNING 60, External interlock
External interlock has been activated. To resume normal
power supply (SMPS) on the power card: 24 V, 5 V, ±18 V. operation:
When powered with 24 V DC with the MCB 107 option, 1. Apply 24 V DC to the terminal programmed for
only the 24 V and 5 V supplies are monitored. When external interlock.
powered with 3-phase mains voltage, all 3 supplies are
monitored. 2. Reset the frequency converter via

WARNING 47, 24V supply low 2a serial communication


The 24 V DC supply is measured on the control card. The 2b digital I/O
external 24 V DC back-up power supply may be
2c by pressing [Reset]
overloaded, otherwise contact the Danfoss supplier.
WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum limit
WARNING 48, 1.8V supply low
The output frequency is higher than the value set in
The 1.8 V DC supply used on the control card is outside of
4-19 Max Output Frequency.
the allowable limits. The power supply is measured on the
control card. Check for a defective control card. If an ALARM 64, Voltage Limit
option card is present, check for an overvoltage condition. The load and speed combination demands a motor
voltage higher than the actual DC link voltage.
WARNING 49, Speed limit
When the speed is not within the specified range in WARNING/ALARM 65, Control card over temperature
parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] and The control card has reached its trip temperature of 80 °C.
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM], the frequency WARNING 66, Heat sink temperature low
converter displays a warning. When the speed is below the The frequency converter is too cold to operate. This
specified limit in 1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] (except when warning is based on the temperature sensor in the IGBT
starting or stopping) the frequency converter trips. module.
ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed Increase the ambient temperature of the unit. Also, a
Contact the Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service. trickle amount of current can be supplied to the frequency
converter whenever the motor is stopped by setting
ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom
parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current at 5% and
The settings for motor voltage, motor current, and motor
parameter 1-80 Function at Stop.
power are wrong. Check the settings in parameters 1-20 to
1-25. Troubleshooting

ALARM 52, AMA low Inom • Check the temperature sensor.


The motor current is too low. Check the settings. • Check the sensor wire between the IGBT and the
gate drive card.
ALARM 53, AMA motor too big
The motor is too big for the AMA to operate.

124 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

ALARM 67, Option module configuration has changed ALARM 80, Drive initialised to default value
One or more options have either been added or removed Parameter settings are initialised to default settings after a
since the last power-down. Check that the configuration manual reset.
change is intentional and reset the unit.
Troubleshooting
ALARM 68, Safe stop activated • Reset the unit to clear the alarm.
STO has been activated.
ALARM 91, Analog input 54 wrong settings
Troubleshooting Switch S202 has to be set in position OFF (voltage input)
• To resume normal operation, apply 24 V DC to when a KTY sensor is connected to analog input terminal
terminal 37, then send a reset signal (via bus, 54.
digital I/O, or by pressing [Reset]).
ALARM 92, No flow
ALARM 69, Power card temperaturePower card A no-flow condition has been detected in the system.
temperature Parameter 22-23 No-Flow Function is set for alarm.
The temperature sensor on the power card is either too
Troubleshooting
hot or too cold.
• Troubleshoot the system and reset the frequency
Troubleshooting converter after the fault has been cleared.
• Check the operation of the door fans. ALARM 93, Dry pump
• Check that the filters for the door fans are not A no-flow condition in the system with the frequency
blocked. converter operating at high speed may indicate a dry
pump. Parameter 22-26 Dry Pump Function is set for alarm.
• Check that the gland plate is properly installed
on IP21/IP54 (NEMA 1/12) frequency converters. Troubleshooting 8 8
ALARM 70, Illegal FC configuration • Troubleshoot the system and reset the frequency
The control card and power card are incompatible. converter after the fault has been cleared.

Troubleshooting ALARM 94, End of curve


The feedback is lower than the setpoint. This may indicate
• Contact the supplier with the type code of the leakage in the system. 22-50 End of Curve Function is set for
unit from the nameplate and the part numbers of
the cards to check compatibility. alarm.

ALARM 72, Dangerous failure Troubleshooting


Safe stop with trip lock. Unexpected signal levels on safe • Troubleshoot the system and reset the frequency
converter after the fault has been cleared.
stop and digital input from the VLT® PTC Thermistor Card
MCB 112. ALARM 95, Broken belt
Torque is below the torque level set for no load, indicating
WARNING 73, Safe stop auto restart
a broken belt. Parameter 22-60 Broken Belt Function is set
Safe stop. With automatic restart enabled, the motor may
for alarm.
start when the fault is cleared.
Troubleshooting
WARNING 76, Power unit setup
The required number of power units do not match the • Troubleshoot the system and reset the frequency
converter after the fault has been cleared.
detected number of active power units. When replacing an
enclosure size F module, this occurs if the power-specific ALARM 96, Start delayed
data in the module power card does not match the rest of Motor start has been delayed due to short-cycle
the frequency converter. protection. Parameter 22-76 Interval between Starts is
enabled.
Troubleshooting
• Confirm that the spare part and its power card Troubleshooting
are the correct part number. • Troubleshoot the system and reset the frequency
converter after the fault has been cleared.
WARNING 77, Reduced power mode
This warning indicates that the frequency converter is WARNING 97, Stop delayed
operating in reduced power mode (that is, less than the Stopping the motor has been delayed due to short cycle
allowed number of inverter sections). This warning is protection. Parameter 22-76 Interval between Starts is
generated on power cycle when the frequency converter is enabled.
set to run with fewer inverters and remains on. Troubleshooting
ALARM 79, Illegal power section configuration • Troubleshoot the system and reset the frequency
The scaling card is the incorrect part number or not converter after the fault has been cleared.
installed. Also, the MK102 connector on the power card
could not be installed.

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 125


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

WARNING 98, Clock fault ALARM 245, Heat sink sensor


Time is not set or the RTC clock has failed. Reset the clock This alarm is only for enclosure size F frequency converters.
in 0-70 Date and Time. It is equivalent to Alarm 39. The report value in the alarm
log indicates which power module generated the alarm:
WARNING 201, Fire mode was active
This indicates that the frequency converter has entered fire 1 = inverter module to the far left.
mode. Cycle power to the unit to remove the warning. See 2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
the fire mode data in the alarm log. converter.
WARNING 202, Fire mode limits exceeded 2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency
While operating in fire mode one or more alarm conditions converter.
have been ignored which would normally trip the unit.
Operating in this condition voids unit warranty. Cycle 3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
power to the unit to remove the warning. See the fire converter.
mode data in the alarm log. 5 = rectifier module.
WARNING 203, Missing motor ALARM 246, Power card supply
With a frequency converter operating multi-motors, an This alarm is only for enclosure size F frequency converters.
underload condition was detected. This could indicate a It is equivalent to Alarm 46. The report value in the alarm
missing motor. Inspect the system for proper operation. log indicates which power module generated the alarm:
WARNING 204, Locked rotor 1 = inverter module to the far left.
With a frequency converter operating multi-motors, an
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
overload condition was detected. This could indicate a
8 8 locked rotor. Inspect the motor for proper operation.
converter.
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency
ALARM 243, Brake IGBT
converter.
This alarm is only for enclosure size F frequency converters.
It is equivalent to Alarm 27. The report value in the alarm 3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
log indicates which power module generated the alarm: converter.

1 = inverter module to the far left. 5 = rectifier module.

2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency ALARM 247, Power card temperature


converter. This alarm is only for enclosure size F frequency converter.
It is equivalent to Alarm 69. The report value in the alarm
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency
log indicates which power module generated the alarm:
converter.
1 = inverter module to the far left.
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
converter. 2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
converter.
5 = rectifier module.
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency
ALARM 244, Heat sink temperature
converter.
This alarm is only for enclosure size F frequency converters.
It is equivalent to Alarm 29. The report value in the alarm 3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
log indicates which power module generated the alarm: converter.

1 = inverter module to the far left. 5 = rectifier module.

2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency ALARM 248, Illegal power section configuration
converter. This alarm is only for enclosure size F frequency converters.
It is equivalent to Alarm 79. The report value in the alarm
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency
log indicates which power module generated the alarm:
converter.
1 = inverter module to the far left.
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
converter. 2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
converter.
5 = rectifier module.
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency
converter.
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
converter.
5 = rectifier module.

126 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Warnings and Alarms Operating Instructions

WARNING 250, New spare part


A component in the frequency converter has been
replaced. To resume normal operation, reset the frequency
converter.
WARNING 251, New typecode
The power card or other components have been replaced
and the typecode changed.
Troubleshooting
• Reset to remove the warning and resume normal
operation.

8 8

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 127


Index Operating Instructions

Index Control card, USB serial communication................................... 109


Control characteristic....................................................................... 109
A Control terminal.................................................................................... 52
Abbreviations and standards............................................................. 4 Cooling.............................................................................................. 26, 83
Access to control terminal................................................................. 52 Cos φ....................................................................................................... 109
Airflow...................................................................................................... 27 Cross-section....................................................................................... 107
Alarm log............................................................................................... 126 Current
Alarm/warning code list.................................................................. 118 level.................................................................................................... 108
mode.................................................................................................. 108
Alarms and warnings........................................................................ 116 range.................................................................................................. 108
AMA................................................................................. 59, 67, 120, 124 Current rating...................................................................................... 120
Analog input............................................................................... 107, 119
Analog output..................................................................................... 108 D
Analog signal....................................................................................... 119 DC link.................................................................................................... 120
Auto energy optimisation compressor........................................ 81 Default setting....................................................................................... 68
Auto energy optimisation VT........................................................... 81 Digital input................................................................................ 107, 120
Automatic motor adaptation (AMA)............................................. 59 Digital output...................................................................................... 108
Discharge time......................................................................................... 6
B Dry pump function.............................................................................. 98
Back cooling........................................................................................... 26 Duct cooling........................................................................................... 26
Brake Duct work cooling kits........................................................................ 29
cable..................................................................................................... 45
control, mechanical......................................................................... 60
E
Brake resistor temperature switch................................................. 45
ELCB relay................................................................................................ 43
Braking................................................................................................... 122
Electrical installation.................................................................... 52, 54
Branch circuit protection................................................................... 46
Enclosure type F option..................................................................... 34

C Energy efficiency class............................................................ 107, 115

Cable length......................................................................................... 107 Example of changing parameter data.......................................... 73

Cable length and cross-section.............................................. 36, 107 External controllers................................................................................ 4

Cabling..................................................................................................... 36 External fan supply.............................................................................. 46

Changes made....................................................................................... 73 External temperature monitoring.................................................. 35

Changing a group of numeric data values............................... 100


F
Changing a text value...................................................................... 100
Feedback..................................................................................... 123, 125
Changing data..................................................................................... 100
Fieldbus connection............................................................................ 51
Changing of data value.................................................................... 101
Function setup...................................................................................... 77
Changing parameter data................................................................. 73
Fuse.................................................................................................. 46, 122
Closed loop.......................................................................................... 122
Fuse specification................................................................................. 47
Coast inverse.......................................................................................... 74
Fusing....................................................................................................... 36
Coasting................................................................................................... 65
Communication option................................................................... 122
G
Control cable................................................................................... 54, 56
General considerations...................................................................... 16
Control card......................................................................................... 119
Gland/conduit entry, IP21 (NEMA 1) and IP54 (NEMA12)...... 28
Control card performance.............................................................. 109
GLCP.......................................................................................................... 67
Control card, 10 V DC output......................................................... 109
Graphical display.................................................................................. 62
Control card, 24 V DC output......................................................... 109
Grounding............................................................................................... 43
Control card, RS-485 serial communication............................. 108

128 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Index Operating Instructions

Motor
H nameplate........................................................................................... 59
thermal protection.......................................................................... 61
High voltage............................................................................................. 6
Motor cable............................................................................................. 44
How to connect a PC to the frequency converter.................... 66
Motor current...................................................................................... 124

I Motor data.................................................................................. 120, 124


Motor insulation................................................................................... 50
IEC emergency stop with Pilz safety relay................................... 34
Motor output....................................................................................... 106
IGBT........................................................................................................... 50
Motor overload protection............................................................... 83
Indexed parameter............................................................................ 101
Motor power........................................................................................ 124
Indicator lights (LED)........................................................................... 63
Motor protection........................................................................... 4, 110
Initialisation............................................................................................ 68
Motor status.............................................................................................. 4
Input polarity of control terminal................................................... 56
Input terminal...................................................................................... 119
N
Installation of 24 V DC external supply......................................... 52
NAMUR..................................................................................................... 34
Installation of input plate option.................................................... 33
No operation.......................................................................................... 74
Installation of mains shield for frequency converter............... 32
Non-UL compliance............................................................................. 47
Installation, duct cooling kit in Rittal............................................. 29
Intended use............................................................................................. 4
O
IRM (insulation resistance monitor)............................................... 34
Operate graphical LCP (GLCP), how to......................................... 62
IT mains.................................................................................................... 43
Ordering................................................................................................... 30
Output current.................................................................................... 120
L
Output performance (U, V, W)....................................................... 106
Language package............................................................................... 74
Outside installation/NEMA 3R kit for Rittal................................. 31
LCP............................................................................................................. 67
Overvoltage......................................................................................... 109
LCP 102..................................................................................................... 62
Leakage current....................................................................................... 6
P
LED............................................................................................................. 62
Parallel connection of motors.......................................................... 60
Lifting.......................................................................................................... 9
Parameter data...................................................................................... 73
Literature.................................................................................................... 5
Parameter menu structure............................................................. 102
Load sharing........................................................................................... 45
Parameter selection............................................................................. 99
Local reference...................................................................................... 76
Parameter set-up.................................................................................. 69
Logging.................................................................................................... 73
PC software tools.................................................................................. 66
Low speed detection........................................................................... 97
PELV..................................................................................... 107, 108, 109
Low-power detection......................................................................... 97
Phase loss.............................................................................................. 120
Pilz relay................................................................................................... 34
M
Planning, installation site..................................................................... 8
Main Menu.............................................................................................. 73
Potentiometer reference................................................................... 58
Main Menu mode.......................................................................... 64, 99
Power connections.............................................................................. 36
Main reactance...................................................................................... 81
Profibus DP-V1....................................................................................... 66
Mains connection................................................................................. 46
Programming...................................................................................... 119
Mains supply (L1, L2, L3).................................................................. 106
Protection and features................................................................... 110
Mains supply 3 x 525-690 V AC..................................................... 113
Pulse input............................................................................................ 108
Manual motor starters........................................................................ 34
Pulse start/stop..................................................................................... 58
Mechanical brake control.................................................................. 60
Mechanical dimensions............................................................... 11, 15
Q
Mechanical installation...................................................................... 16
Qualified personnel................................................................................ 6

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 129


Index Operating Instructions

Quick Menu............................................................................................. 73
Quick Menu mode......................................................................... 64, 73 U
Quick transfer of parameter settings when using GLCP........ 67 Unintended start..................................................................................... 6
Unpacking................................................................................................. 9
R
RCD (residual current device)........................................................... 34 V
Receiving, frequency converter......................................................... 9 Voltage imbalance............................................................................. 120
Relay Voltage level........................................................................................ 107
1........................................................................................................... 109 Voltage reference via a potentiometer........................................ 58
2........................................................................................................... 109
output................................................................................................ 109
W
Remote commands................................................................................ 4
Windmilling............................................................................................... 7
Reset.............................................................................................. 120, 125
Wire access.............................................................................................. 16
RFI Switch................................................................................................ 43
RS-485 bus connection....................................................................... 66

S
Safe Torque Off........................................................................................ 7
Screened cable...................................................................................... 44
Screened/armoured............................................................................ 56
Screening of cables.............................................................................. 36
Serial communication...................................................................... 109
Short circuit.......................................................................................... 121
Sine-wave filter...................................................................................... 36
Space......................................................................................................... 16
Space heater and thermostat.......................................................... 34
Speed up/down.................................................................................... 58
Start/stop................................................................................................. 57
Stator leakage reactance................................................................... 81
Status........................................................................................................ 64
Status messages.................................................................................... 62
STO........................................................................................................ 7, 34
Supply voltage.................................................................................... 122
Surrounding......................................................................................... 106
Switches S201, S202 and S801......................................................... 56
Switching frequency........................................................................... 36
System feedback..................................................................................... 4

T
Terminal 54........................................................................................... 125
Terminal location.................................................................................. 17
Thermal protection................................................................................ 5
Thermistor..................................................................................... 83, 120
Three ways of operating.................................................................... 62
Torque...................................................................................................... 43
Torque characteristic........................................................................ 106
Torque for terminals............................................................................ 44

130 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. MG11F502


Index Operating Instructions

MG11F502 Danfoss A/S © 08/2014 All rights reserved. 131


www.danfoss.com/drives

Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to
products already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed. All trademarks in this material are property
of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.

Danfoss A/S
Ulsnaes 1
DK-6300 Graasten
www.danfoss.com/drives

130R0346 MG11F502 08/2014

*MG11F502*

You might also like